JP7837710B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display of specific identification information, and as a result of this variable display of specific identification information, the machine can be controlled to a favorable state for the player by deriving a specific display result.

As a type of pachinko game machine, there were some that displayed multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in a variable manner, corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some machines implemented a control system that displayed a normal background during the first customer waiting period after the variable pattern display had finished, and then displayed a demonstration display during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period had ended (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-86392 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-22196

In gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, there was room to improve their marketability.

This invention was conceived in view of the aforementioned circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

(1) A gaming machine that, upon fulfillment of the starting conditions, displays variable identification information including first identification information and second identification information, and can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background displays, including the first background display and the second background display.
When switching the background display from the first background display to the second background display, it is possible to perform a background fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the first background display, and a background fade-in display that gradually decreases the transparency of the second background display.
The region in which the variable display of the identification information is performed includes at least a first region and a second region,
When the variable display of the identification information is started, the variable display of the first identification information is started in the first region and the variable display of the second identification information is started in the second region.
When the variable display of the first identification information is started, a first identification information fade-out display is possible in the first area, which gradually increases the transparency of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is started, a second identification information fade-out display is possible in the second area, which gradually increases the transparency of the second identification information.
When the variable display of the identification information is terminated, the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down in the first region, and the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down in the second region.
When the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down, a first identification information fade-in display is possible in which the transparency of the first identification information is gradually reduced in the first region, and when the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down, a second identification information fade-in display is possible in which the transparency of the second identification information is gradually reduced in the second region.
At least the first identification information fade-out display or the second identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display can be executed at the same time.
The execution period for the first identification information fade-out display and the execution period for the second identification information fade-out display are the same.
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the first identification information fade-out display and the second identification information fade-out display.
During the first period after the game has ended, the background display can be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display can be shown.
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display switches from the background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the start condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the display will switch from the demonstration display to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information before the fade-out display of the first identification information and the fade-out display of the second identification information are started.
Information regarding the variable display of the aforementioned identification information can be displayed as a specific display.
When the background display is displayed, the specific display can be displayed.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed, the aforementioned specific display can be displayed,
The total number of luminance data in the aforementioned demonstration display luminance data table is greater than the total number of luminance data in the aforementioned background display luminance data table.
It is possible to display a volume control guide to help with volume adjustment.
If the game is played while the volume adjustment guidance display is not displayed, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the game, the volume adjustment guidance display can be displayed. Subsequently, if the conditions for starting the demonstration display are met, the demonstration display can be displayed without displaying the volume adjustment guidance display.
It is characterized by the following:
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control, thereby improving the product's appeal.

Furthermore, the present invention may have only the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention, or it may have the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention along with other features not described therein.

This is a front view showing the gaming machine in Embodiment 1. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is a diagram to explain the decorative patterns and sub-patterns. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the second performance mode, (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the third performance mode, and (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the fourth performance mode. Figures (A1) and (A2) show the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the first performance mode, and figures (B1) and (B2) show the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the second performance mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the third performance mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols. (A) is the action to start the change of the decorative pattern, (B) is the action to stop the change, and (C) is the loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing the duration of various actions of decorative patterns and the control of lamp illumination, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop illumination control of the lamp. Figures (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) illustrate examples of how the hold indicator works. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 26. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the second performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 28. This diagram shows the details of the variable display flow of the decorative pattern in Figure 28. This diagram shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as an example of modification 1. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 31. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. This is a diagram to explain how the decorative patterns appear. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode. This diagram shows the sequence of stop displays for decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). This diagram shows the sequence of stop displays for the decorative patterns that follow Figure 36. Figures (A) to (G) show the sequence of stop displays for decorative symbols when there are 3 reserved symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). Figures (A) and (B) show the sequence of stop displays for decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode (third performance mode). (A1) is a diagram showing the first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the background change. This diagram shows the background change sequence in the first performance mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first performance mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second performance mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth performance modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode, (B) is in the second performance mode, and (C) is in the third and fourth performance modes. This figure shows an example of how a demo performance for customers works. This figure shows an example of what happens when a winning combination is triggered during a customer waiting demo. This diagram shows the flow of the pseudo-consecutive win notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo-consecutive win count display color determination table. This diagram shows the flow of the reach animation. This diagram shows the sequence of events following Figure 50. This diagram shows examples of the operation of each part in the reach animation. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出) sequence following Figure 53. This diagram shows examples of the operation of each part in the SP Reach animation. Figures (A1) to (A7) show a modified example of the present invention, part 2. Figures (A) to (D) show a modified example 3 of the present invention. This is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the third performance mode. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 79. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode, and (B) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the second and third performance modes. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation in a low base state. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing the start and end conditions for displaying the demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the demo movie display. This diagram shows examples of how each part operates during the demo video. This is a diagram illustrating the transitions in the demo performance while waiting for customers. This figure shows an example of how the demo movie display works. This figure shows an example of how the demo movie display works. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display in the first scene (company name), (B) is an example of the display in the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) is an example of the display in the fourth scene (warning 2). This diagram compares the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2), the number of reserved symbols, and the small symbols. This diagram shows the illumination patterns of the lamps corresponding to the game state. (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). Figures (A1) to (A8) show examples of operation when a customer waiting demo is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state has finished. Figures (A4) to (A5) show the main parts of Figure 94. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a low base state. Figures (B1) to (B8) show examples of how customer waiting demo effects work in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a high base state. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up in a cold start state and then a customer waiting demo sequence begins. This is a timing chart showing the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up in a cold start state until the customer waiting demo begins. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up with a hot start in a low base state, and then a customer waiting demo sequence begins. This timing chart shows the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a low base state, to when the customer waiting demo performance begins. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up with a hot start in a high base state, and then the customer waiting demo sequence begins. This timing chart shows the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state, to when the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figures (A) to (E) show examples of operation when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events that occur when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events that occur when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed, under high base conditions. Figures (A) to (E) show examples of operation when the demo movie display starts and ends upon winning a prize in a low base state. Figures (A) to (G) show the details of the high base state of the display mode in Figure 110. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the first win in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends when the second start is awarded, under low base conditions. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the second start and winning when the game is in a high base state. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the first win in a high base state. Figures (A) to (C) show examples of operation when the demo movie display is terminated by steering wheel operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when the demo movie display ends due to steering input in a low base state. Figures (A) to (C) show examples of operation when the demo movie display is terminated by menu operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when a demo movie display ends due to menu operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when the demo movie display ends via menu operation in a high base state. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device in response to a prize win, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of erroneous operation of the payout device in response to a prize win. This figure shows an example of how the system works when a bulb failure error occurs during a customer-waiting demo. This is a diagram to explain priority layers. This diagram shows the process when an error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance that starts in a low base state. This diagram shows the process when an error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance that starts in a high base state. This diagram explains the mechanism of output to the LED driver. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management in the child table. This figure shows an example of a parent table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a child table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This diagram shows the lamp data table used when not playing (only the white flashing button and red flashing button are used during gameplay). Lamp Data Table: Background This diagram shows the settings of the normal parent table. Lamp Data Table: Background This diagram shows the settings of a normal child table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for a typical grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for a typical grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the child table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings in the parent table for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings in the parent table for the red blinking button. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that blinks red. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for the button that blinks red. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for initialization notifications. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the child table for initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table of the initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for errors. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the error child table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table for errors. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. Figures (A1) to (A4) show examples of how text is displayed and how light is emitted in each scene. (A) is a diagram showing examples of actions in the first scene, (B) is in the third scene, and (C) is in the fourth scene. This is a comparison table showing text animation displays. (A) and (B) are diagrams used to explain analogous colors. This diagram illustrates the timing of the demo movie display. Figures (A) to (G) show the details of the high base state of the display mode in Figure 110.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the following examples.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of type 1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size is smaller than the aforementioned decorative identification information, and it is possible to perform variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to each of the multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of small symbols corresponding to decorative symbols),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a movable display (for example, a scroll display; see Figure 21) that moves the decorative identification information.
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display that switches to other reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information (for example, a switching display; see Figure 22(E)).
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, it is possible to switch the reduced identification information multiple times during the period from when one decorative identification information is displayed until the display of that one decorative identification information ends (for example, when one decorative pattern is displayed, during the period Ta2 until the display of that decorative pattern ends, the smaller patterns are switched five times, and each is displayed for a period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). See Figure 22(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is composed of a combination of the aforementioned decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is composed of a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination of the decorative identification information, which corresponds to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched in the variable display of the reduced identification information so that it does not become a combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived. (For example, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying a confirmed decorative symbol for a losing combination (e.g., "326"), the display is switched so that the small symbol for the losing combination of the same "326" as the decorative symbol is not displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started but before the confirmed decorative symbol for the losing combination (e.g., "326") is stopped. See Figure 22(E))
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as a result of the display of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched in the variable display of the reduced identification information so as not to be a combination of reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived. Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as a result of the display of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, thus preventing a decrease in interest.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of type 2 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is composed of a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the effective display area from among the multiple decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, the part where a jackpot or a miss occurs depending on the combination of decorative symbols such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
When a non-specific combination of the decorative identification information is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, which corresponds to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is possible to display the decorative identification information in a manner in which it is enlarged from its normal size and then returned to its normal size (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 can perform a variation stop action when it temporarily stops displaying the decorative pattern in a variable display based on a losing variation pattern. See Figures 36 to 38, 42, and 43).
When the decorative identification information that is stopped in the effective display area is enlarged, the decorative identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged (see Modification 3 in Figure 57).
During the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern for a predetermined light emission period, and this predetermined light emission control is also continued when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 performs a variable stop action when temporarily stopping the display of the decorative pattern, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the player to focus their attention on the decorative identification information that is stopped in the active display area. This is achieved when a non-specific combination of decorative identification information, which corresponds to a non-specific display result, is derived as a result of the variable display of decorative identification information. Furthermore, even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept in the area where the decorative identification information is displayed. Additionally, when decorative identification information that is stopped in the active display area is enlarged, decorative identification information that is not located in the active display area is not enlarged, thus allowing the player's gaze to be concentrated on the decorative identification information that is stopped in the active area, and reducing the load on display control. Moreover, since the predetermined light emission control continues even when enlarging decorative identification information that is stopped in the active display area, the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, a scrolling display) that moves the decorative identification information from the back to the front while increasing its transparency and then erases it (see Figures 28 to 30).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decorative identification information, other decorative identification information located behind the first decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information, the character image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, while the numerical image is not displayed, and after the first decorative identification information is erased, the numerical image of the other decorative identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 30(A) and 30(B), between the time the first decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time it is displayed out of the frame, (For example, decorative pattern "2") may be partially overlapped by another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located behind it, which may become visible through decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character of the character display section 002SG052 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") of the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), as shown in Figure 30(C), where the number ("3") of the number display section 002SG051 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed after decorative pattern "2" has been erased.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when displaying decorative identification information by moving it from the back to the front while increasing its transparency and then erasing it, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information. However, in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed, but the numerical image is not. The numerical image of the other decorative identification information is displayed only after the first decorative identification information is erased, so the numerical image of the first decorative identification information and the numerical image of the other decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the numerical image of the first decorative identification information located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of type 3-2 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, a scrolling display) that moves the decorative identification information from the front to the back while increasing its transparency and then erases it (see Figures 31 and 32).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decorative identification information, another decorative identification information located behind the first decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information, the character image of the first decorative identification information is displayed, while the numeric image is not displayed, and the numeric image of the first decorative identification information is displayed after the other decorative identification information is erased. (For example, as shown in Figures 31(G) and 31(H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front to the back, so between the time the decorative pattern is displayed in the frame-in to frame-out of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") located behind the first decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") may become visible through decorative pattern "3" in the time it is displayed, while the character of the character display section 002SG052 of decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the numeric number ("2") of the numeric display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Modification 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when displaying decorative identification information by moving it from the front to the back while increasing its transparency and then erasing it, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information becomes visible through the first decorative identification information. However, in this case, the character image of the first decorative identification information located in the front is displayed, but the numerical image is not. The numerical image of the first decorative identification information is displayed only after the other decorative identification information has been erased. Therefore, the numerical images of the other decorative identification information and the numerical image of the first decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the numerical images of the other decorative identification information located in the back from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of type 5 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the decorative identification information includes a rotating display that rotates the decorative identification information to repeatedly display the front and back surfaces of the decorative identification information (see Figures 33 and 34).
During the rotation display, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, and when the rotation display stops, the decorative identification information becomes opaque (see Figures 33 and 34).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG051),
During the rotational display, the numerical image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is semi-transparent, is displayed, while the numerical image on the back side is not displayed (see Figure 34).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission manner for a predetermined light emission period, and this predetermined light emission control is also continued during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed in the high base state, a light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed based on a loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)). Modified example: see Figure 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when rotating decorative identification information to repeatedly display both the front and back surfaces of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, allowing both the front and back surfaces to be seen. However, while the numerical image on the front surface of the decorative identification information is displayed, the numerical image on the back surface is not displayed. Therefore, the numerical images on the front and back surfaces of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the numerical image on the front surface from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, since predetermined light emission control continues during rotational display, the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of type 5 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
When the aforementioned specific display result is derived, a reach state is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information temporarily stops in the first and second regions, and then a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information that forms the reach state stops in the third region.
When the aforementioned reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (for example, a reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed and erased so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information that has been temporarily stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information that is being variably displayed in the third region (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect).
After the reach state is reached, until the reach line indication effect is executed, the decorative identification information being displayed in the third region is made transparent with a first transparency (for example, first transmittance F1), and after the reach line indication effect is executed, the decorative identification information being displayed in the third region is made transparent with a second transparency (for example, second transmittance F2) which is less transparent than the first transparency (see Figure 52).
After the execution of the reach line suggestion effect, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is removed from the third area (for example, after the execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the timing at which the transparency of the decorative symbol being variably displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is set to a second transparency F2 which is lower than the first transparency F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been removed from the central decorative symbol display area 5C. See Figures 50 to 52).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach is achieved, a reach line suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the ornament identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the ornament identification information being displayed variably in the third region. At the same time that the reach line suggestion image is removed from the third region, the ornament identification information being displayed variably in the third region becomes a second transparency, which is lower than the first transparency. Therefore, the ornament identification information being displayed variably in the third region does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The game machine of type 6 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Equipped with a light-emitting means,
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
When the aforementioned specific display result is derived, a reach state is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information temporarily stops in the first and second regions, and then a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information that forms the reach state stops in the third region.
When the aforementioned reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (for example, a reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed and erased so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information that has been temporarily stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information that is being variably displayed in the third region (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect).
When the aforementioned reach line suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to perform an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first and second regions, and a separated display that separates the decorative identification information after the enlarged display has been performed (see Figures 50 to 52).
The second period from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1 < te1). See Figure 52.
The light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
During the execution of the reach line indication effect, it is possible to perform a light-off control to turn off the specific light-emitting means (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the movable lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information being displayed variably in the third region. Furthermore, the decoration identification information stopped in the first and second regions is displayed enlarged for a first period, and then displayed spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decoration identification information that forms the reach state. In addition, by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of type 7 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Equipped with a light-emitting means,
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
When the aforementioned specific display result is derived, a reach state is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information temporarily stops in the first and second regions, and then a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the same type of decorative identification information that forms the reach state stops in the third region.
When the aforementioned reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (for example, a reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed and erased so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information that has been temporarily stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information that is being variably displayed in the third region (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect).
The light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
During the execution of the reach line indication effect, it is possible to perform a light-off control to turn off the specific light-emitting means (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the movable lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decoration identification information being displayed variably in the third region. Furthermore, by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of type 8 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises light-emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern ends. See Figures 23(C), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, it repeatedly executes loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. See Figures 24(B), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the aforementioned special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the high base state, it does not execute the loop action of the decorative pattern. See Figure 44).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4. See Figure 24(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the repeated execution of predetermined operation display control in normal conditions to encourage the player to display variable decorative identification information, while preventing excessive prompting and annoyance of variable display in special conditions where variable display is easily performed. Furthermore, since the predetermined operation display control is repeated at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be effectively highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of type 9 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
Information regarding the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started can be stored as reserved information (for example, in the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved items in the start prize determination process of step S101),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is composed of the combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the effective display area (for example, the part where a jackpot or a miss occurs depending on the combination of decorative symbols such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
In the normal state, if a non-specific combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is possible to display the decorative identification information in a manner in which it is enlarged from its normal size and then returned to its normal size, according to the number of reserved items stored as reserved storage information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 can perform a variable stop action when temporarily stopping the display of the decorative pattern. See Figures 36 to 39).
In the aforementioned special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at its normal size regardless of the number of reserved items stored as reserved information (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved items, the variation stop action is not executed, and the display is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size. See Figures 39 and 44).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops, depending on the number of reserved memories, thereby enhancing the user experience. However, in special conditions where the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, it can be stopped while maintaining its size, thus ensuring that the visibility of the decorative identification information is not compromised.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period for the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period for the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 in which the first background image 002SG081 fades out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of scrolling display of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until high-speed display begins (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21). See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this characteristic, the shorter the duration of the fade-out display, the more abruptly it appears to disappear. Therefore, if the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change may occur at the same time, the fade-out display of the identification information can be executed in a shorter period than the background fade-out display, drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period for the aforementioned identification information fade-out display and the execution period for the aforementioned background fade-out display are different (for example, the portion where fade-out display period A1 and fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature ensures that the synchronization of the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background prevents it from becoming difficult to recognize that the variable display of decorative identification information has begun.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
The gaming machine of form 12 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 in which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21 in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the start of the deceleration of the display speed until the temporary stop display is displayed (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21). See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this characteristic, since fade-in displays generally give the impression of appearing abruptly the shorter the period over which they are executed, if the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change may occur at the same time, the fade-in display of the identification information can be executed in a shorter period than the background fade-in display, drawing attention to the termination of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background images, including a first background image and a second background image (for example, in the first performance mode, it is possible to switch between displaying a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) which represents a view of a city during the day from a distance, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) which represents a view of the city during the day).
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased. At the same time, a background fade-in display is performed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being performed (for example, a crossfade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See Figure 40).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, a portion of a decorative pattern that gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and whose transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and is then faded out).
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information ends, it is possible to perform an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, as the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period for the aforementioned identification information fade-in display and the execution period for the aforementioned background fade-in display are different (for example, the portion where fade-in display period B1 and fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for synchronization between the fade-in display of identification information and the fade-in display of the background, preventing it from becoming difficult to notice when the variable display of decorative identification information has ended.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
The gaming machine of form 14 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform a specific effect in which the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily paused at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a "pseudo-consecutive display" in which the decorative symbols are temporarily paused at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed, that is, whether to make one variable display appear as multiple variable displays).
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a digit image.
When the variable display is restarted in the aforementioned specific performance, a count image that can identify the number of times the variable display has been restarted (for example, a pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212) can be displayed in multiple colors (for example, blue, red) (see Figures 48 and 49).
In the aforementioned specific performance, there is a first combination in which the numerical image of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the numerical display of the count image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the colors of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the count image are different; and a second combination in which both the numerical image of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the numerical display of the count image when the variable display is resumed, as well as the colors of the temporarily stopped decorative identification symbol and the count image, are of the same type.
In the aforementioned specific performance, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination (for example, in a pseudo-consecutive win予告, there is a first combination where the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display are not the same color, and a second combination where the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display are the same color, and in the pseudo-consecutive win予告, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the enjoyment of the game by not only allowing players to see whether a specific effect is performed, but also drawing attention to the combination of numbers and colors in the display of the temporary stop-displayed decorative identification information and the count image.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
The gaming machine of type 15 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size is smaller than the aforementioned decorative identification information, and it is possible to perform variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to each of the multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of small symbols corresponding to decorative symbols),
When variable display is not being performed, a standby animation can be executed that displays a predetermined image (for example, the part in which the animation control CPU 120 can execute the "customer waiting demo animation" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving a customer waiting demo specification command output from the main board 11, without receiving any control commands such as a variable display start specification command. See Figure 46).
While the aforementioned standby animation is being performed, the decorative identification information is hidden, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see Figure 46).
When the condition for starting the variable display is met while the standby animation is being performed, the variable display of the reduced identification information starts before the predetermined image is hidden, and then the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display starts after the predetermined image is hidden (for example, when a starting win occurs while the customer waiting demo animation is being performed, the variable display of the small symbols starts before the customer waiting demo animation image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo animation image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the animation mode at that time (in this case, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first animation mode) is displayed, and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display starts. See Figure 47).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of decorative identification information begins after the predetermined image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has started in accordance with the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the variable display. However, since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the predetermined image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
The gaming machine of form 16 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the aforementioned normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols does not start until the hold shift display period ends, when the aforementioned variation start action is performed and the hold shift display period ends. See Figures 26(C) to (F)).
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 or the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command). See Figure 25.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer compared to the special state, and the interest of the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can be enhanced. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of type 17 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the normal state described above, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is finished (for example, the scrolling display (variable display) of decorative symbols is not started until the holding shift display period ends, when the first holding display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol holding memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to be displayed as the active display 002SG103, and the aforementioned variation start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of decorative symbols is started after the holding shift display period has ended. See Figures 26(C) to (F)).
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 or the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command). See Figure 25.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for switching displays by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a different manner than the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display is completed and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer compared to the special state, and the interest when the variable display of decorative identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can be enhanced. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of type 18 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the aforementioned special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is not started until the hold shift display period ends, until the aforementioned variation start action is performed and the hold shift display period ends. Modified example),
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 or the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when a variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command). See Figure 25.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the special state can be enhanced. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on multiple types of variable display patterns (see Figure 7), the variable display of the specific identification information is executed (for example, the part in step S25 where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing).
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet been started (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 in the special figure pending storage display area 5U during the pending display update process in step S161),
It is possible to display a corresponding display in the corresponding display area that corresponds to the variable display of the special identification information being executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F during the pending display update process in step S161),
In conjunction with the start of the variable display of the specified identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display that moves the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special feature pending memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F and switches it to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
As a variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display that moves the decorative identification information (for example, a scrolling display; see Figure 21) and a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display (for example, a variation start action; see Figure 23(A)).
In the aforementioned special state, while the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the movement display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is not started until the hold shift display period ends, when the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to be displayed as the active display 002SG103, and the aforementioned variation start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started after the hold shift display period has ended. Modified example)
Based on variable display pattern information corresponding to multiple types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the same switching display when a variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when a variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in a common manner when a variable display is performed based on the first type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern specification command) and when a variable display is performed based on the second type of variable pattern specification command (for example, a reach variable pattern specification command), switching the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103. See Figure 25).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display by performing a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display when the variable display of specific identification information begins, and by performing a pre-operation display that operates the decorative identification information in a different manner than the moving display before the moving display of the decorative identification information begins while the switching display is being performed. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display is completed and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of decorative identification information in the special state can be enhanced. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of type 20 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control the system to any of several types of performance modes (for example, first to fourth performance modes), including the first performance mode and the second performance mode.
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be performed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, in the part where the decorative pattern gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and the transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing it to fade out),
In the first performance mode, a moving display is performed to move the decorative identification information as a variable display of the decorative identification information (see Figures 20(A1) and (A2)).
In the second performance mode, a special variable display, which differs in form from the moving display, is performed as a variable display of the decorative identification information (see Figures 20(B1) and (B2)).
The duration of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second performance mode is longer than the duration of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first performance mode (for example, the portion where the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first performance mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) and (B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second performance mode, not only is the variable display of decorative identification information different from that of the first performance mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of the variable display until the decorative identification information disappears is also longer, allowing the decorative identification information to be viewed for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control the system to any of several types of performance modes (for example, first to fourth performance modes), including the first performance mode and the second performance mode.
When the variable display of the aforementioned decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be performed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then erased (for example, in the part where the decorative pattern gradually accelerates to high-speed display after the scrolling display starts, and the transparency increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing it to fade out),
The variable display pattern of the decorative identification information can be determined to be one of several types of variable display patterns.
The duration of the fade-out display differs depending on whether a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 differ depending on whether a non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode. See Figures 45(A) and 45(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it difficult for players to predict which variable display pattern is being determined, as the fade-out duration differs depending on whether the game is controlled in the first or second performance mode. This enhances the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means performs a variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, an information display unit 002SG053) which is information related to the character in the character image.
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the decorative identification information starts to display in a variable manner, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to display in a variable manner (for example, the variable display period for a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small patterns starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
The character image is displayed during the period before variable display and the period after variable display.
The aforementioned related information image is displayed during the pre-variable display period and then erased before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the character name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variation start action is executed, and then erased before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See Figures 23(A) and 26).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows players to deepen their understanding of the characters by drawing their attention to related information images before the variable display of decorative identification information begins, i.e., when it is displayed in a stationary state. Furthermore, by clearing the related information images before the variable display begins, players can be drawn to the variable display and pre-announcement effects rather than the related information images.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the aforementioned normal state, the system can be controlled to any of several types of performance modes, including a first performance mode (e.g., first performance mode) and a second performance mode (e.g., second performance mode) (for example, first to fourth performance modes; see Figure 20).
In the aforementioned special state, the performance mode can be controlled to include a third performance mode (for example, a third performance mode or a fourth performance mode),
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a character image (for example, a character display unit 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, an information display unit 002SG053) which is information related to the character in the character image.
In the first performance mode, the decorative identification information is displayed in a manner that includes the character image and the related information image (see Figure 26).
In the second and third performance modes, the decorative identification information is displayed in a manner that does not include the related information image (see Figures 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows players to deepen their understanding of the characters by displaying related information images in the first presentation mode, drawing their attention to these images. In contrast, in the second and third presentation modes, the related information images are hidden, allowing players to focus on variable displays and予告演出 (pre-announcement effects) rather than the related information images.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the specified identification information is executed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control between a normal state (e.g., a low probability, low base state) and a special state (e.g., a low probability, high base state or a high probability, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to occur and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a numeric image (for example, a numeric display unit 002SG061),
Normally, when the background image is displayed, it is possible to perform a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can perform an SP reach effect that indicates whether or not it will result in a jackpot),
In the aforementioned notification presentation, a specific background image different from the normal background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) is displayed.
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of winning symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 53(F))).
Upon the end of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 53(G), upon the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed).
When the aforementioned normal background image is displayed, a specific image (for example, specific image 002SG075) is displayed in close proximity to the numerical image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result that is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing flames is displayed in response to the numerical display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot-confirming decorative symbols displayed after the SP reach performance ends (see Figures 53(H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing flames is not displayed in response to the numerical display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot-confirming decorative symbols displayed after the SP reach performance ends (see Figures 54(P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in normal conditions, the effect of the performance is enhanced and the excitement is heightened by displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance. However, in special conditions where the average variable display period is short, the variable display can be made to feel faster by not displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine described in form 17 or form 18,
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the variable display of the specified identification information has ended, and the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) that was displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased, an erase effect display (e.g., erase effect 002SG110) that emphasizes that the corresponding display has been erased can be displayed.
If the pending display is displayed when the erase effect display is shown, the erase effect display will continue to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is started (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 will continue to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and will be erased only after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left is started, as shown below. See Figure 25 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents a decline in the entertainment value of the performance by eliminating any gaps in the visual presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next. Furthermore, the erase effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display for the completed variable display has been erased, while the display of a new corresponding display allows them to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine described in form 17 or form 18,
The area where the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (for example, a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (for example, a central decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first and second areas.
In the normal state described above, the third region displays decorative identification information in a smaller size than the first and second regions (see, for example, Figure 19).
In the aforementioned special state, the decorative identification information for the first region, the second region, and the third region is displayed at the same size (see, for example, Figure 19).
The third region in the special state is positioned closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third region in the normal state (see, for example, Figure 19).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of depth and enhanced interest by displaying decorative identification information in the first and second regions prominently in the normal state, and shifting the decorative identification information in the third region. However, in the special state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned closer to the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko gaming machine).

Next, an embodiment for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following description, the front side of Figure 1 will be considered the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be considered the rear (rear, back view) side. The description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing the player playing the game. Furthermore, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a sub-symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. The sub-symbol is displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, the right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 20) prompting the player to shoot to the right, and the remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 20) indicating the remaining time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variable display of the fourth symbol allows for the recognition of whether or not the decorative symbols are currently being displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize. For example, the variable display of the decorative symbols may disappear from the screen for a moment, or the movable parts 32A and 32B may obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, which is installed in a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to the variable display. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to both the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the first hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the second hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism with an openable and closable movable piece. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Note that the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball entry device 6A and the variable prize ball entry device 6B, a special variable prize ball entry device 7 with a large prize entry opening is provided. The special variable prize ball entry device 7 includes a large prize entry opening door driven by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and this door forms a large prize entry opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 in the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 1), movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided, which operate according to the effects. Movable body lamps 9d are also provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, along with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamps 9d are composed of LEDs.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot remains open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined maximum number of times (e.g., 15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32A and 32B, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15, as shown in Figure 2. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and, based on the received commands, executes various performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including the driving of movable parts 32A and 32B, error notifications, power outage recovery notifications, and other various notifications).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, indicating the operation content as appropriate).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the animation based on animation execution instructions from the animation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels; images from higher layers have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images from lower layers have a lower display priority.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 3 images. Additionally, the VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is the area where the image drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create the image to be displaced, and then the displacement image is applied to this image to create the displacement image.

The display image creation area is the area where images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to form a display image for display on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are set to have the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area are set to have a lower display priority than images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5 (display priority: medium), and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are set to have the lowest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: low). In other words, Layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is the middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The Layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing images to display a first interface image, which includes a special symbol hold memory display area 5U that clearly displays the first and second special symbol hold memory counts, located at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image, which includes small symbols with a smaller display area than the decorative symbols and a hold memory count display, located at the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5.

The Layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area located in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the Layer 3 image rendering area is a rendering area that renders the background image in order to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 image drawing area (Layer 1 image), the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 2 image drawing area (Layer 2 image), and the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 3 image drawing area (Layer 3 image) are superimposed to generate an image that can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as mentioned above, the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area (decorative patterns) have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as middle-layer images in the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area (background image) have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as low-layer images in the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the movable parts 32A and 32B to the movable parts 32A and 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable parts 32A and 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of movable parts 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate movable parts 32A and 32B, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 3(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is set as the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variation control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is set as the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variation control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variation control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving probability variation state). Furthermore, the time-saving bonus mode is sometimes simply referred to as the "bonus mode."

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 3(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is performed may be provided.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot state. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 6(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss," specifically when the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," as well as when the variable display result is "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" is called the "not a reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "not a reach miss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "a reach" is called the "reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the "not a reach variation pattern" and the "reach variation pattern" are included in the "miss variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" is called the "jackpot variation pattern."

The jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns include normal reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a super reach is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of super reach variation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive wins), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive win), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive wins), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of super reach variation patterns, or two or fewer types, may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the Super Reach variation patterns include: a variation pattern (PB1-2) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-2) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (no pseudo-consecutive spins); a variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-3) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (one pseudo-consecutive spins); and a variation pattern (PB1-4) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (two pseudo-consecutive spins).

As shown in Figure 7, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 8, if the variable display result is a non-probability-changing jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table A from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot A to C, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table B from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is one or less, then the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and using this miss variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern for no shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), and PA2-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) miss). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 2, then the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 30% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table C, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 20% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a high-base state (short-time state or probability-increasing state), the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this losing variation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach loss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern). More specifically, in the losing variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 at a rate of 10%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is illustrated as determining the variation pattern according to the type of jackpot when the result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection ratio of any of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied regardless of the type of jackpot, for example, depending on the game state. By doing so, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern suitable for the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 002SG150, as shown in Figure 9, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 002SG150 shown in Figure 9 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 002SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected). Based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition during the passage (entry) of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. This data is stored as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 002SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 002SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data storage area 002SG190, as shown in Figure 10(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A, as shown in Figure 10(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, two commands—a starting slot award designation command (either the first or second starting slot award designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (either the first or second reserved memory count notification command)—are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 002SG194A are allocated to store these starting slot award designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands separately in the first and second special symbol reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 002SG194A when a win occurs at the first start entry slot. Similarly, when a win occurs at the second start entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 002SG194A. During a win, commands from the start entry slot specification command to the hold memory count notification command are transmitted sequentially. Therefore, upon command reception, the start entry slot specification command and the hold memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory, respectively.

As shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 002SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 12. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 12, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 12 as a special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of reserved items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of reserved items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 12.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (002SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (002SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 002SGS102 is not at the upper limit (002SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (002SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not, based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (002SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either process 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is also updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data representing each extracted random value and the start gate buffer value are stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103, by executing the processing of 002SGS109, extracts numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (002SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 12.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 configures the settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (002SGS113), for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The pending memory count notification command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 12.

After executing the process in 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 13 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, as displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002SGS141, the second hold memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 002SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 002SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 002SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special symbol hold memory count is "0" or not (step 002SGS145). The first special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold memory count value stored in the first hold memory counter and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. Thus, the process of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 002SGS141 that the second special symbol hold memory count is "0", and it determines whether the first special symbol hold memory count is "0" or not. As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol will be started with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage is not "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 002SGS146, the first special symbol hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special symbol hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special symbol hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special symbol hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 002SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 5 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, which is the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). In step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the machine is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result will be judged as a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and as a "miss" if it does not.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

In step 002SGS154, the type of jackpot is determined, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. This is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; N), the process in step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 002SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has already been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 16. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of movable parts 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

In this embodiment, the background display update process selects and displays one of the following: a first background image corresponding to the first performance mode, a second background image corresponding to the second performance mode, a third background image corresponding to the third performance mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth performance mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is low probability/high base, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is high probability/high base. Furthermore, the switching between the first and second background images occurs when certain display conditions are met, such as when a variable display of an SP reach is executed, or when one of the background images has been displayed continuously for a predetermined period.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 16 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 17, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a hold display update process (step S161) which updates the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 and second hold display 002SG102) in the special hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents of the start-winning received command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display. After the hold display update process is executed, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

Furthermore, in step S161, a pre-announcement setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process. This process involves determining, deciding, and setting for executing a pre-announcement effect (for example, an effect that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when a prize is awarded upon start.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable parts 32A and 32B, output voice and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/flashe the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained. Figure 18 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 17. In the variable display start setting process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol hold memory in the start-up winning received command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS272). The contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and flags stored in the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol hold memory in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer are shifted one buffer number higher (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, and therefore it is erased.

After step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002 SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result specification command is a second variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) where three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbols. Furthermore, when the received variable display result specification command is a third to fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variation jackpots B through C, the CPU 120 determines the stopping symbols from among multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Furthermore, when the received variable display result specification command is a fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability variation jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols where three symbols are aligned as even numbers as the stopping symbols.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability-increasing jackpot, it may be possible to determine the stopping symbol from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"), similar to the case where the received variable display result specification command is the third to fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability-increasing jackpots B to C. In this case, by further standardizing the effects during variable display in jackpot games and probability-increasing states, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the game state is a probability-increasing state or a time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and furthermore, whether the time-saving state ends after 100 variable displays or continues until 10,000 variable displays, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is a first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, and the variable display's variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, then a combination of decorative symbols (losing symbols) where three symbols are mismatched is determined as the stopping symbols. Also, if the received variable display result specification command is a first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, and the variable display's variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, then a combination of symbols where the left and right symbols are the same but the middle symbol is different (losing symbols) is determined as the stopping symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the CPU 120 for performance control can, for example, extract a random number to determine the stop symbol and use a stop symbol determination table, which associates data and numerical values indicating combinations of decorative symbols, to determine the stop symbol for the decorative symbols. That is, the stop symbol can be determined by selecting data indicating combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern specification command for a super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) accompanied by a pseudo-consecutive win (step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is not a variation pattern specification command for a super reach, that is, if it is a variation pattern specification command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern specification command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5C that form the reach state are determined in step 002SGS276 from the data indicating the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols that are determined and stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo-consecutive count display determination table shown in Figure 49(C), the display color of the pseudo-consecutive count display to be displayed when the first re-variable display starts, that is, the pseudo-consecutive count display indicating that two variable displays will start in that variable display, including the initial variable display (for example, "×2"), is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, in step 002SGS275, it is determined whether the variable pattern specification command read is a super reach variable pattern with two pseudo-consecutive displays (step 002SGS279). If it is determined to be a super reach variable pattern with two pseudo-consecutive displays (step 002SGS279; Y), the display color of the pseudo-consecutive display to be displayed when the second re-variable display starts is determined and stored using the pseudo-consecutive display count determination table shown in Figure 49(C). This pseudo-consecutive display count indicates that three variable displays will start in that variable display, including the first variable display (for example, "×3") (step 002SGS280).

Then, if it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not one of two pseudo-consecutive wins, or if the process in step 002SGS280 is executed, a start-wait timer is set to begin displaying the number of pseudo-consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

Furthermore, the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and associated with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002 SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative and sub-patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal to the image display device 5 corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative and sub-patterns. Then, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Decorative design and small design)
Next, the decorative patterns and sub-patterns will be explained based on Figures 19 to 22. Figure 19 is a diagram illustrating the decorative patterns and sub-patterns. Figure 20 shows the configurations for the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), the second performance mode (B1) and (B2), the third performance mode (C1) and (C2), and the fourth performance mode (D1) and (D2). Figure 21 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative patterns in the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), and the second performance mode (B1) and (B2). Figure 22 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative patterns in the third performance mode (C1) and (C2), and the fourth performance mode (D1) and (D2), and (E) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the variable display of the decorative patterns and sub-patterns.

In Figure 19, the sizes of the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are shown in the proportions they appear in when displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in Figure 19, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a number display section 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base section and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 002SG051 (not all characters are shown); an information display section 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters displayed on the front of the information base section (for example, the character's name in this embodiment); and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG054 that surrounds the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 is shown to display the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various other information besides the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it relates to the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

Furthermore, when the game state is in the high-base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R (for the high-base state) consist of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of numbers from "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that surrounds the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high-base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low-base state.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures from the numbers of the decorative symbols.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base settings), decorative patterns (for high base settings), and small patterns.

<Display Timing of Each Symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are displayed almost continuously in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the power of the image display device 5 is on. However, they may be erased (hidden) when, for example, an SP reach (super reach) effect is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the decorative symbols while the power of the image display device 5 is on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable Display Modes for Each Symbol> For decorative symbols (for low base state), variable display is performed in the first performance mode (described later) by scrolling the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a linear motion from top to bottom. In the second performance mode, variable display is performed by scrolling the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved motion from back to front.

The decorative symbols (for high base state) are displayed variably in the third performance mode described later, rotating around a vertical axis in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the fourth performance mode, the decorative symbols are displayed variably in the fourth performance mode, scrolling linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR will display a variable pattern through a switching display (a display where the symbols are updated) where the symbols from "0" to "9" switch.

Furthermore, while the "scrolling display" and "switching display" described above are broadly both included in "switching display" where patterns are switched, as described later, a "scrolling display" may be defined as a display where multiple patterns are updated by a pattern that is displayed in frame or fade-in within the display area, then moves, and then moves out of the display area or fades out. A "switching display" may be defined as a display where multiple patterns are updated by repeatedly showing and hiding (erasing) or rotating within a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

The decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) include not only the numerical display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also the character display section 002SG052, the information display section 002SG053, and the base display section 002SG054, whereas the small patterns consist only of the numerical display section.

Furthermore, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) are displayed at the same size in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, while they are displayed at a slightly smaller size in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C than in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed at the same size in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged linearly in the left-right direction. The small symbols are displayed at the same size in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

Furthermore, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are positioned approximately horizontally at the approximate center of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. However, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is positioned slightly above the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, thus being positioned slightly above the approximate center of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the high base state, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is positioned approximately horizontally at the approximate center of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the high base state, the decorative pattern that stops and is displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern that stops and is displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 20).

Furthermore, using the size of the numerical display section 002SG051 of the decorative design (for low base state) as a reference, the numerical display section 002SG061 of the decorative design (for high base state) is larger, while the numerical display section of the small design is smaller. In other words, the numerical display sections are larger in the order of decorative design (high base state), decorative design (low base state), and small design (numerical display section size: decorative design (high base state) > decorative design (low base state) > small design). The overall size of each design also follows a similar relationship to that of the numerical display section.

Thus, in the low base state, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are made larger, and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C are shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest. However, in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative symbols are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the recognizability of the decorative symbols (see Figure 20).

Furthermore, the numerical display sections of the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are each formed using stereoscopic images (3D images, three-dimensional images). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3D computer graphics (a virtual three-dimensional object constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, with information to reproduce materials on each surface, and reproduced by illuminating the object with arbitrary light intensity and light source position). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed three-dimensionally when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols, the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" correspond to "probability-increasing jackpots," which are controlled to a high-probability, high-base state after the jackpot ends. The even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" correspond to "non-probability-increasing jackpots," which are controlled to a low-probability, high-base state after the jackpot ends. It is also possible that even in the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, the jackpot combination may be predetermined by the normal symbols.

<Character Display Section> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed using a non-stereoscopic image (2D image). However, the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed using a stereoscopic image (3D image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs predetermined actions (operations) at the start and stop of the variable display, as described later. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 for the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed using a non-stereoscopic image (2D image). Alternatively, the information display unit 002SG053 may be formed using a stereoscopic image (3D image). Furthermore, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the "name," which is information related to the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052. As described later, the "name" is erased when the variable display starts. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base Display Section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative design (for low base state) displays the decorative part that adorns the character on the front and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image). The base display section 002SG064 of the decorative design (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image). Both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D images). Furthermore, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative design (for high base state) is larger than the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative design (for low base state). On the other hand, the small design does not have a base display section.

<Main Colors> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for probability-increasing symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base sections other than the numbers, and the base display sections 002SG054 and 002SG064, may be the same color as the numbers, or they may be displayed in a different color.

Furthermore, the characters displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 should be composed of their own original colors, without being influenced by the main color. Also, as characters corresponding to the probability variation symbols, for example, if there are separate ally and enemy characters, it is preferable that the character is an ally character. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character is a central figure in the story, such as the protagonist or a character closely related to the protagonist, among the ally characters.

Furthermore, as described above, when applying the narrative concepts of allies and enemies, the preview and special reach sequences are generally presented from the perspective of the allies. If the special reach sequence involves a battle between allies and enemies, the player is notified that the outcome is favorable to them (e.g., a jackpot) if the allies win.

Furthermore, the primary color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (low base state) and decorative symbol (high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the regular symbols consisting of even numbers were traditionally "blue" and the bonus symbols consisting of odd numbers were "red," these may be other colors as well.

Furthermore, in high-base states, as described later, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, requiring the decorative symbols to be more visually appealing than those used in low-base states. Therefore, stop symbol announcements and spin start announcements are often implemented by incorporating effect displays with the decorative symbols. Consequently, decorative symbols (high-base states) are primarily composed of the number display unit 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio compared to decorative symbols (low-base states) which are composed of both character and number display units.

Although not shown in the illustrations of this embodiment, the numbers in the decorative patterns (for the high base state) may be made more visually striking than those in the decorative patterns (for the low base state) by making their operation more complex or design-oriented, thereby enhancing the appeal of the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for bonus symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, regular symbols consisting of even numbers were "yellow" and bonus symbols consisting of odd numbers were "yellow-green," but other colors may be used. Also, numbers identical to decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

Regarding the design of the smaller symbols, it is acceptable to simply scale down and display the same material as the numbers of the decorative symbols in the low-base and high-base states. However, rather than enhancing the visual effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers of the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with simple colors without gloss or other finishes).

As shown in Figure 20, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: a first presentation mode (see Figures 20(A1) and (A2)), a second presentation mode (see Figures 20(B1) and (B2)), a third presentation mode (see Figures 20(C1) and (C2)), and a fourth presentation mode (see Figures 20(D1) and (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are executable when the game state is controlled to a low probability, low base state. The third presentation mode is executable when the game state is controlled to a low probability, high base state, and the fourth presentation mode is executable when the game state is controlled to a high probability, high base state.

As shown in Figure 20(A1), in the first performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background image 002SG081, which depicts a daytime city scene, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, as shown in Figures 21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed frame-in (for example, the "3" pattern) passes the decorative pattern stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed frame-in and moves downwards. In other words, as shown in Figure 21 (A2), when the preceding "3" decorative symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, after the preceding "3" decorative symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", repeating the update display from "0" to "9". Therefore, the decorative symbols from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 screen displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and small symbols. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen display the first reserved display 002SG101 and the second reserved display 002SG102, which correspond to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103, which corresponds to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that these first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes, and therefore their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in Figure 20 (B1), in the second performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second background image 002SG082, which depicts a daytime wilderness landscape, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is achieved by a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved manner from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For details, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed framing-in, approaching the center of the screen from the upper left edge of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right edge of the right decorative pattern display area 5R. They then move downwards, moving away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed framing-out from the lower left edge of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right edge of the right decorative pattern display area 5R. The central decorative pattern is displayed enlarged, approaching the foreground from the back of the screen in the central decorative pattern display area 5C, before being displayed framing-out.

Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the "2" symbol) displayed within the frame passes the stopping position of the decorative symbol, which is set at the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "3" symbol) is displayed within the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, as shown in Figure 21 (B2), when the preceding "2" symbol is passing near the stopping position, both the preceding "2" symbol and the following "3" symbol are visible, but after the preceding "2" symbol has passed the stopping position, the following "3" symbol and the "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", and the update display from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" through "9" are displayed in a loop within each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 20(C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the third background image 002SG083, which depicts a city scene at dusk, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by rotation in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, rotating around a rotation axis that faces vertically.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 22(C1) and (C2), the decorative pattern in the third display mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a. The first surface 5a displays the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the "3" pattern). On the other hand, when the first surface 5a is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display section 002SG064 has low transparency (is opaque), it is not possible to see through the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface 5b from the front (to see it through the decorative pattern from the front).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view). By rotating in the order of the first face 5a, second face 5b, first face 5a, second face 5b, and so on, the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", and so on, returning to "0" after "9", and the update display from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the rotation display of the decorative patterns is performed by looping the display of the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22 (C2), when the first face 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from its front-facing position to display the second face 5b, the second face 5b displays the decorative pattern that follows the decorative pattern displayed on the first face 5a (for example, the decorative pattern of "3") (for example, the decorative pattern of "4"). Then, although not specifically illustrated, when the second face 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from its front-facing position to display the first face 5a, the first face 5a displays the decorative pattern that follows the decorative pattern displayed on the second face 5b (for example, the decorative pattern of "4") (for example, the decorative pattern of "5").

Furthermore, the upper right portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-hitting" to inform the player to perform right-hitting operations. The lower left portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a time-saving display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed.

As shown in Figure 20(D1), in the fourth performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the fourth background image 002SG084, depicting a night city scene, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, as shown in Figures 22 (D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Furthermore, when a preceding decorative pattern displayed frame-in (for example, the "3" pattern) passes the decorative pattern stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed frame-in and moves downwards. In other words, as shown in Figure 22 (D1), when the preceding "3" decorative symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in Figure 22 (D2), after the preceding "3" decorative symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. Thus, the decorative symbols increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", they return to "0", repeating the increase from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the upper right corner of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right.

Furthermore, in the second performance mode, the name displayed on the decorative symbol information display unit 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth performance modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display unit 002SG053. Thus, in the first performance mode, displaying the information display unit 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. In contrast, in the second and third performance modes, hiding the information display unit 002SG053 allows players to focus on the variable display and pre-announcement effects rather than the character. It should be noted that not only the name displayed on the information display unit 002SG053, but the information display unit 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 22(E), the decorative patterns and sub-patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during the period when the decorative patterns are displayed by high-speed scrolling, it takes a period of Ta2 for one decorative pattern to be displayed from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until it is displayed from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period of Ta2 for one decorative pattern to be displayed and for that decorative pattern display to end. On the other hand, during the above period Ta2, the sub-patterns of losing combinations are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

For more details, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (displaying 30 frames per second), then 10 frames of a decorative pattern will be displayed from the start to the end of its display, and this period Ta2 is approximately 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, the smaller symbols are displayed in pairs of two frames each (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.), with each pair appearing every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from the display of one decorative symbol until that symbol finishes displaying, the smaller symbols switch between five losing combinations, each displayed for the duration of period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Although each losing combination is displayed for the duration of period Ta1, it is only for a brief moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to visually confirm.

Furthermore, based on the determination that the variable display result will be a losing display result, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed losing combination decorative symbol (for example, "326"), it will switch the display so that the small symbol of the losing combination ("326") is not displayed after starting the variable display of the said decorative symbol and before stopping the display of the confirmed losing combination decorative symbol (for example, "326"). Therefore, it is prevented that the small symbol of the losing combination will reveal in advance that the losing combination decorative symbol will be stopped.

Furthermore, in the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in the first, second, and fourth performance modes, and the rotating display in the third performance mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed at a constant speed from the start to the stop of the variable display.

(Various actions of decorative patterns)
Next, the various operation displays of the decorative patterns will be explained based on Figure 23. Figure 23 shows (A) the action to start the variation of the decorative pattern, (B) the action to stop the variation, and (C) the loop action.

As shown in Figures 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative patterns for the low base state move within the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within those areas, in order to perform variable display. In addition to these variable display movements, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the numerical display section 002SG051 and the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative patterns.

(Action to initiate change)
As shown in Figure 23(A), when variable display is started in the first and second performance modes, the decorative pattern performs a "variation start action" in which the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 reverses the orientation of its body. Specifically, in variation start action A1, the character is in its normal orientation with both hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the right; in variation start action A2, it is in an orientation with both hands raised and spread out, facing forward; and in variation start action A3, the character is in an orientation with both hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the left. Here, for the sake of explanation, only the state of the three frames of variation start action A1, A2, and A3 is shown, but in reality, the character is displayed for several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1 to A3), causing the variation start action (movement) to occur in which the orientation of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward to the left, the decorative pattern moves a predetermined distance (upward) from its stopping position in the opposite direction of the scroll (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby initiating the scrolling display. These variation initiation actions A1 to A4 are executed during the variation initiation action period Tb1 (see Figure 24), which lasts from the start of the variable display of the special pattern until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern (movement of the decorative pattern downward) begins.

For the sake of explanation, only the state of the four frames of the variation initiation action A1, A2, A3, and A4 is shown here. However, in reality, the variation initiation action (movement) is performed by the character's movement display over several tens of frames during the variation initiation action period Tb1, until the character's body orientation reverses.

In this embodiment, the variation initiation action is illustrated by an example in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation initiation action can be changed to other forms. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or their body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the following components—the number display unit 002SG051, the character display unit 002SG052, the information display unit 002SG053, and the base display unit 002SG054—performs an action. In other words, the variation initiation action is an action performed before the decorative pattern begins scrolling or rotating, and is a separate action that causes a change in the scrolling display, i.e., operates in a manner different from the scrolling display.

Furthermore, in the first performance mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is made easily visible when the display is stopped, while being hidden after the scrolling display begins, thereby drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period for the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special and small symbols until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbols, and a post-variable display period after the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbols. The character names (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 are displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variation start action is being executed, and are then erased before the start of the post-variable display period, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the names during the variation start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and pre-announcement effects rather than the names.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a configuration where the period from the start of variable display of special and small symbols to the start of scrolling display of decorative symbols is defined as the pre-variable display period, the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period can be any period from the fulfillment of the variable display start conditions to the start of variable display of decorative symbols; that is, from the start of variable display based on the timing of the initial win or the retention memory to the start of scrolling display of decorative symbols.

(Stopping fluctuation action)
As shown in Figure 23(B), when the variable display ends in the first and second performance modes (when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), a "variation stop action" is performed on the decorative symbols, in which the character displayed on the character display unit 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern temporarily stops at the stopping position, the character, initially in its normal orientation with hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), is enlarged to extend significantly above the base display section 002SG054 (variation stop action B2), and then reduced to its normal orientation (variation stop action B3).

For the sake of explanation, only the three frames of the motion stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here. However, in reality, the motion stop action (movement) is performed by the character being displayed in motion for several tens of frames during the motion stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it returns to its original size.

In this embodiment, a mode in which the character is enlarged is used as an example of the variation stop action. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the variation stop action can be changed to modes other than those described above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, or base display unit 002SG054 that forms the decorative pattern may also perform the action. In other words, the variation stop action is an action performed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 23(C), when the variable display ends in the first and second performance modes (from the time the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped until they are stopped (symbol confirmed)), a "loop action" is performed in which the characters displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 repeatedly shrink and restore, and the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis that faces up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character is in the normal position with both hands on its hips and facing diagonally forward to the right, and the number display unit 002SG051 is facing forward. In loop action C2, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits within the base display unit 002SG054, and the number display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right. In loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, and the number display unit 002SG051 is in the normal position facing forward. In loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits within the base display unit 002SG054, and the number display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. This loop action executes loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 sequentially over a loop action period Tb3. After the end of the loop action period Tb3, it returns to loop action C1, and then loop actions C1 through C4 are executed again over another loop action period Tb3. In other words, the loop action executes loop actions C1 through C4 periodically.

For the sake of explanation, only the state of the four frames of loop action C1 to C4 is shown here. However, in reality, the loop action (operation) is performed by displaying the character and the number display unit 002SG051 for several tens of frames during the loop action period Tb3, from when the character is reduced in size to when it is restored, and until the number display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores itself.

In this embodiment, a loop action is exemplified in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop action can be changed to other forms. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient for at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, or base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern to perform an action. In other words, the loop action is an action performed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at the stop position until it is displayed at the stop position (pattern finalization), and is a separate action from the action that changes in the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and luminescence periods)
Next, the various actions of the decorative patterns and the control of the lamp's illumination will be explained based on Figure 24. Figure 24 shows (A) a comparison of the duration of the various actions of the decorative patterns and the control of the lamp's illumination, and (B) an example of loop illumination control of the lamp.

As shown in Figure 24(A), the decorative pattern change start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 23(A)) have an execution period of approximately 1.5 seconds (Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds) and consist of approximately 45 frames. The decorative pattern change stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 23(B)) have an execution period of approximately 0.8 seconds (Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds) and consist of approximately 28 frames. The decorative pattern loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 23(C)) have a loop action period of approximately 1.8 seconds (Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds) and consist of approximately 55 frames.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 24(B), the movable lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A located at the top of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B located at the bottom of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, illuminate based on the loop illumination control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the game state is in a low base state.

This loop emission control works as follows: for example, over a loop emission period Tb4 (a period of 1), the light emits "white," "blue," and "yellow" in that order. After the end of the loop emission period Tb4, it returns to "white," and then again emits "white," "blue," and "yellow" in that order during the loop emission period Tb4. This process is repeated periodically. In other words, the loop emission control periodically executes the emission of "white," "blue," and "yellow" light.

Furthermore, the loop illumination period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop illumination period Tb4). This design ensures that in low-base states, the loop action is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to display the variable decorative symbols, while in high-base states, where variable display is more easily performed than in low-base states, it prevents excessive prompting of variable display, which could become annoying. Additionally, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop illumination control, the decorative symbols can be effectively highlighted.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" light emission is performed periodically. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emission color and pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" light are emitted in that order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" light emission, may be performed periodically, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be performed periodically.

Furthermore, the various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the performance mode is the first or second performance mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the performance mode is the third or fourth performance mode. Also, the loop illumination control of the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 24(B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the performance mode is the first or second performance mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the performance mode is the third or fourth performance mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold indicator will be explained based on Figure 25. Figure 25 shows diagrams illustrating examples of the hold indicator's operation, with (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4).

As shown in Figure 25 (A1), when the game is in standby mode (number of reserved balls "0"), the reserved ball display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 do not display any reserved balls. The special reserved ball display area 5U consists of four display areas. The first display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-1" in the start-up winning command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 25 (A2), when a starting win (for example, a first starting win) occurs during game standby, the first reserve display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U. Next, the first reserve display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upwards to the left (see Figure 25 (A3)), then moves diagonally downwards to the left towards the active display area 5F in a parabolic arc. Upon reaching the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (A2), at the moment a starting win occurs, the first reserve indicator 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U and not in the active display area 5F. However, when the first reserve indicator 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first starting win, the variable display of the small symbols begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in Figure 25 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not finished, so if the scrolling display of decorative symbols starts while the shift display is still ongoing, it becomes unclear which of the first reserved displays 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponds to, which may cause discomfort to the player.

Therefore, the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols does not begin until the hold shift display period has ended. The aforementioned variation start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols begins only after the hold shift display period has ended.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in Figure 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased only after the next variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started, as shown below. In this way, by avoiding a gap in the performance between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, the enjoyment of the performance can be maintained. Additionally, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, while simultaneously recognizing the start of a new variable display by the display of the new active display 002SG103.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 25 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left towards the active display area 5F in a parabolic arc. Upon moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (B4)).

Furthermore, the first hold indicator 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left as the first hold indicator 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, moves (see Figure 25 (B3)), and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon the end of the variable display, as shown in Figure 25 (B3), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has not yet moved to the active display area 5F. However, at the moment the movement display of the first reserved display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in Figure 25 (B4), the first reserved symbol 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, has not yet finished moving (shifting) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of decorative symbols starts in this state, it becomes unclear which first reserved symbol 002SG101 corresponds to the scrolling display, potentially causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, until the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to display as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned variable start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbols begins. The scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbols begins only after the hold shift display period has ended.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner for the first to fourth performance modes. Therefore, the shift display shown in Figure 25 is executed in a common manner for the first to fourth performance modes. However, for example, if a special symbol hold memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each performance mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each performance mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 25, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a shift display that switches the first reserve display 002SG101 and the second reserve display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 using a common operation mode (for example, a mode in which the reserve display moves in an arc from the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) for multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns). However, it may be possible to execute shift displays with multiple operation modes corresponding to each variation pattern and each performance mode. Also, it may be possible to execute shift displays with different operation modes depending on whether the game state is a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, the common behavioral patterns for multiple types of shift display variations include those in which at least one of several elements—such as the display mode from the time the held display switches to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period—is common.

In this embodiment, upon the occurrence of a starting prize, the first reserve display 002SG101 (or second reserve display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U, and then the first reserve display 002SG101 (or second reserve display 002SG102) is moved and displayed (shifted) from the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the number of reserves is "0", upon the occurrence of a starting prize, the first reserve display 002SG101 (or second reserve display 002SG102) may not be displayed in the special symbol reserve memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a switching display (shift display) that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the first held display 002SG101 is shown moving non-linearly (for example, in an arc) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol held memory display area 5U toward the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display may be moved linearly toward the left. Also, the switching display (shift display) may not only slide the held display, but may also erase the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F and the first held display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol held memory display area 5U, and then start displaying the new active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Examples of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, examples of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be explained based on Figures 26 to 35. Figure 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first performance mode. Figure 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 26. Figure 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second performance mode. Figure 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 28. Figure 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 28. Figure 31 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as a modified example 1. Figure 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 31. Figure 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third performance mode. Figure 34 is a diagram to explain how the decorative patterns look. Figure 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth performance mode.

Furthermore, in the following diagrams representing the display screen of the image display device 5, lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without labels do not represent images displayed on the screen, but are intended to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in the first performance mode)
First, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the first performance mode, based on Figures 26 and 27.

Figure 26(A) shows the state in the first performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols (see Figure 23(A)) begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display begins in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 26(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins moving horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 26(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 26(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 26(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins.

As shown in Figure 26(E), when the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, moves to the active display area 5F, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are completed, and the upward action A4 is started. When the upward movement (action A4) is completed, as shown in Figure 26(F), the downward movement begins, and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 26(F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, and the upward action A4 begins. Once the upward movement (action A4) is complete, downward movement begins, and scrolling display commences, as shown in Figure 26(G).

Next, as shown in Figure 26(G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, and the upward action A4 begins. Once the upward movement (action A4) is complete, downward movement begins, and scrolling display commences, as shown in Figure 26(H).

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins in that order. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, the decorative symbols perform a variation start action, even though they do not scroll, thus allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 26(F) and (G), starts at low speed immediately after the variable display begins, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 26(H), and then to high speed as shown in Figures 27(I), (J), and (K). As the transparency increases with speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speed. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed, with a fade-out display being implemented where the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the second performance mode)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the second performance mode, based on Figures 28 and 29.

Figure 28(A) shows the state in the second performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, in the second performance mode, the name of the decorative symbol information display unit 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols (see Figure 23(A)) begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display begins in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 28(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins moving horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 28(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 28(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 28(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 28(E), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 002SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are completed, and the backward action A4 is started. When the backward movement towards the back of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in Figure 28(F), the forward movement is started, and the scrolling display begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 28(F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, and the backward movement action A4 begins. Once the backward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 28(G), forward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 28(G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, and the backward movement action A4 begins. Once the backward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 28(H), forward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, the decorative symbols perform a variation start action, even though they do not scroll, thus allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 28(F) and (G), starts at low speed immediately after the variable display begins, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 28(H), and then to high speed as shown in Figures 29(I), (J), and (K). As the transparency increases with speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speed. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed, with a fade-out display being implemented where the transparency increases with acceleration.

Thus, the scrolling display in the second display mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing the transparency (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 30(A) and 30(B), in the scrolling display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the back to the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative pattern is displayed in frame-in and out of frame-out in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located behind a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") may become visible through decorative pattern "2". At this time, the character of the decorative pattern "3" in the character display unit 002SG052 is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display unit 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). As shown in Figure 30(C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number ("3") in the number display unit 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

Furthermore, while the other decorative pattern "3," located behind the first decorative pattern "2," becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "2," in this case, the character of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind it is displayed, while the number of the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. Because the number of decorative pattern "3" is displayed only after the decorative pattern "2" has been erased, the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to distinguish.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 30(A), the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing its transparency from the time it is framed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until it is framed out as shown in Figure 30(C). However, at the start of variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative pattern is faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed. Therefore, it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the screen while increasing its transparency as it fades out according to the display speed. Consequently, from the start of scrolling display until high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 30(A) to 30(C). However, after the fade-out display period ends and high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative pattern even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation as variation 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns as Modification 1 is started will be explained based on Figures 31 and 32. In this Modification 1, the decorative patterns are displayed by scrolling in a curved manner, similar to the second display mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front of the screen to the back.

The flow shown in Figures 31(A) to 31(D) is the same as that shown in Figures 28(A) to 28(D), therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

As shown in Figure 31(E), when the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are completed, and the backward action A4 begins. Once the forward movement towards the front of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in Figure 31(F), the backward movement begins, and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 31(F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, and the forward movement action A4 begins. Once the forward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 31(G), the backward movement begins and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 31(G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, and the forward movement action A4 begins. Once the forward movement (action A4) is complete, as shown in Figure 31(H), the backward movement begins and the scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, the decorative symbols perform a variation start action, even though they do not scroll, thus allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the images also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes almost 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is initially displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in Figures 31(F) and (G), then progresses to medium speed as shown in Figure 31(H), and finally to high speed as shown in Figures 32(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transparency also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speeds. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed. A fade-out display is also implemented, where the transparency increases as the speed increases.

Thus, the scroll display in Modification 1 is configured to move and disappear while increasing transparency (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 31(G) and 31(H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time a decorative pattern is displayed in the frame-in and out-of-frame areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") positioned so as to partially overlap one decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") on the back side may become visible through decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character of the character display section 002SG052 of decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") of the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

Furthermore, while the other decorative pattern "2," located behind the first decorative pattern "3," becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "3," in this case, the character of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind it is displayed, while the number of the numerical display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. Because the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap, preventing the "3" of the decorative pattern located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing its transparency (transparency) from the time it is framed in to frame out of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, at the start of variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative pattern fades out in proportion to the increase in display speed. Therefore, it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the screen while increasing its transparency (transparency) as it fades out according to the display speed. Consequently, from the start of scrolling display until high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 31(F) to 31(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative pattern even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third performance mode)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the third performance mode, based on Figures 33 and 34.

Figure 33(A) shows the state in the third performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were rotated and displayed in the respective decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, on a higher layer (in front of them).

Next, as shown in Figure 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 33(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 33(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 33(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 33(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 33(F), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 002SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the rotation display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the rotation display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the rotation display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the rotation display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the rotation display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when the rotation display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 33(E) and 33(F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially at low speed after the start of variable display, progress through medium speed as shown in Figure 33(G), and then to high speed as shown in Figure 33(H). Since the transparency also increases with increasing speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern.

As shown in Figure 34, the rotation display in the third display mode rotates the decorative pattern to repeatedly display the first face 5a and the second face 5b. During the rotation display, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, and becomes opaque when the rotation display stops. Furthermore, the numerical display section 002SG051 on the first face 5a of the decorative pattern, which is semi-transparent during the rotation display, is displayed, while the numerical display section 002SG051 on the second face 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 34(A), when the decorative pattern is rotated at a low speed and displayed in a semi-transparent state with a transmittance of the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R shows that the number "326" displayed on the first side 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (or planned to be displayed) on the second side 5b (the reverse side) is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is higher than the first transmittance (second transmittance), the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R shows that the number "437" displayed on the second side 5b is visible, but the number "548" displayed (or planned to be displayed) on the first side 5a (reverse side) is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(C), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at high speed, and the transparency is higher than the second transparency (third transparency), in a semi-transparent state, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "763" displayed on the first side 5a is visible, albeit with difficulty, while the number "874" displayed (or planned to be displayed) on the second side 5b (the reverse side) is difficult to see. Note that during high-speed rotation, both the first side 5a and the second side 5b become difficult to see.

In this way, when rotating the decorative pattern to repeatedly display both its front and back surfaces, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent. Therefore, both the front surface (e.g., the first surface 5a) and the back surface (e.g., the second surface 5b) of the decorative pattern become transparent and visible. However, in this case, the numbers on the front surface (e.g., the first surface 5a) are displayed, while the numbers on the back surface (e.g., the second surface 5b) are not. This prevents the numbers on the front and back surfaces from overlapping, thus preventing the numbers on the front surface from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in a high base state, a loop emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)) may be used to repeatedly execute an emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the fourth performance mode will be explained based on Figure 35.

Figure 35(A) shows the state in the fourth performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 002SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 002SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, on a higher layer (in front of them). (See Figure 23(A))

Next, as shown in Figure 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 35(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 35(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 35(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 35(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 35(F), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 002SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display of the first held display 002SG101, which is displayed in the first display area from the left, moving to the active display area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 002SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when scrolling begins, the scroll speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increases from low speed to medium speed to high speed. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the image also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 35(E) and 35(F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially displayed at low speed, then progress to medium speed as shown in Figure 35(G), and finally to high speed as shown in Figure 35(H). Since the transparency also increases with increasing speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually distinguish each decorative pattern.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the CPU 120 for performance control is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols, and prevents the scrolling display of the decorative symbols from starting until the shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. It is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command). Therefore, even when variable displays are executed based on different types of variable display patterns, a common shift display is performed, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs a change start action for the decorative symbols and does not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it does not perform a change start action for the decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it may perform a change start action for the decorative symbols and not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, even in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. Since it is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command), a common shift display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, a configuration is illustrated in which, after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. As long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is in operation.

(Examples of operation of each part when the symbols are stopped and displayed)
Next, examples of the operation of each part when the symbols stop will be explained based on Figures 36 to 40. Figure 36 is a diagram showing the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). Figure 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols following Figure 36. Figure 38 shows the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first performance mode (second performance mode) (A) to (G). Figure 39 shows the flow of the stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode (third performance mode) (A) and (B).

(Example of symbol stop display operation in the first performance mode [number of reserved items: 2 or less])
First, we will explain, based on Figures 36 and 37, examples of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols stop displaying in the variable display based on the losing variation pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first performance mode. Note that the second performance mode is almost the same as the first performance mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 36(A), when decorative patterns are being displayed at high speed and scrolling in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for stopping the display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which was being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 36(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36(D)). Then, a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 36(E)). After that, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) begins while the pattern is temporarily stopped and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily paused, as shown in Figure 36(F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which was being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transmittance (transparency), thereby improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 36(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36(H)). Then, a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37(I)). After that, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) begins while the pattern is temporarily stopped and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 37(J), the display speed of the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, which were being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transparency (transparency), improving the visibility of the decorative symbols (see Figure 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 37(K)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 37(L)). Then, a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37(M)). After that, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) begins while the pattern is temporarily stopped and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern is finished.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed in a stopped state, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 37(M)).

(Example of the symbol stop display operation in the first performance mode [number of reserved items: "3"])
Next, we will explain the operation of each part when the decorative symbols stop displaying in the variable display when there are 3 reserved memory slots in the first performance mode, based on Figures 38(A) to (G). In the second performance mode, only the background image is different, and everything else is almost the same as the first performance mode, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 38(A), when decorative patterns are being displayed at high speed and scrolling in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for stopping the display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which was being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 38(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's variation stop action (see Figure 23(B)) displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

When the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, which were being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transparency (transparency), improving the visibility of the decorative symbols (see Figure 38(D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 36(E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's variation stop action displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 (see Figure 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, which were being displayed at high speed, decreases, and a fade-in display is executed, gradually decreasing the transparency (transparency), improving the visibility of the decorative symbols (see Figure 38(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 38(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's variation stop action displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 (see Figure 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is executed after the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed in a stopped state, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 38(G)).

(Example of the symbol stop display operation in the fourth performance mode)
Next, we will explain the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are stopped in the variable display in the fourth performance mode, based on Figures 39(A) and (B). In the third performance mode, only the background image is different, and everything else is almost the same as the fourth performance mode, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 39(A), when decorative patterns are being displayed at high speed and scrolling in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for stopping the display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each display area 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases simultaneously, and a fade-in display is executed, in which the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 39(B)).

Then, the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are simultaneously temporarily displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this point, the transparency of the decorative patterns becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character's movement stop action (see Figure 23(B)) displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbols ends, the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are also displayed in a stopped state, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 39(C)).

Thus, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the variation stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative symbols when they temporarily stop, thereby enhancing the entertainment value. On the other hand, in a low base state where the number of reserved memories is three, or in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative symbols are difficult to see, if a variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variation stop action is not executed. Instead, the symbols are temporarily stopped while maintaining their size, thus preventing any loss of visibility of the decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving image) data for the various movements of the decorative patterns could be created by combining materials for each period, such as 1. from the start of variable display to just before high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display, 3. from low-speed variable display to the stop of variable display, and 4. stopped pattern. However, regarding 2. high-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transparency of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent. Even though it is possible to recognize that they are being displayed rapidly, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, having separate animation data for each type of decorative pattern (depending on which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from) is largely meaningless and only burdens the capacity of ROM 121. For this reason, it is preferable to use common data for the high-speed variable display animation, regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change behavior)
Next, an example of background change operation will be explained based on Figures 40 and 41. In Figure 40, (A1) is the first background image, (A2) is the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the background change. Figure 41 is a diagram showing the flow of background change in the first performance mode.

As shown in Figure 40, in the first performance mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40(A1)) representing a distant view of a city during the daytime, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40(A2)) representing a scene within the city during the daytime. The background image switch is triggered when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when an SP reach fails) is met. In this embodiment, the switch is performed at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach failure (for example, at the start of the variable display).

In this embodiment, the first performance mode is illustrated by an example where the display switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively display three or more background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the conditions for switching are not limited to those described above. They may also be met when a specific performance other than an SP reach is executed, when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period, or when a selection is made by the player.

Furthermore, while the start timing of the switching display in this embodiment is set to the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative pattern enters a "reach" state.

As shown in Figure 40(B), when the display switches from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when the display switches from the first predetermined background image 002SG081A to the first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image 002SG081, which is displayed with 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears. At the same time, a fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden with 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a crossfade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 41(A), while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, its transmittance (transparency) increases over time, making it difficult to see (see Figure 41(B)). Meanwhile, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, displayed on a lower layer of the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming visible again (see Figure 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 41(D) and 41(E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 becomes 100% and it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and it becomes easily visible (see Figure 41(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, meaning that the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may begin after the fade-out display period A1 has ended.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a configuration where the transparency always increases at a constant rate during the fade-out display of the background image or decorative pattern, and decreases at a constant rate during the fade-in display of the background image or decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this. The transparency during the fade-out and fade-in displays of the background image is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transparency may slowly increase or decrease during the first period, and then rapidly increase or decrease during the second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which background images are switched and displayed in one performance mode (for example, a first performance mode or a second performance mode), the present invention is not limited to this. It is also applicable to configurations where the background image switches from a first background image corresponding to the first performance mode to a second background image corresponding to the second performance mode, and where the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Examples of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each performance mode will be explained based on Figures 42 to 45. Figure 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first performance mode. Figure 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second performance mode. Figure 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth performance modes. Figure 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of the variable display in (A) the first performance mode, (B) the second performance mode, and (C) the third and fourth performance modes.

(First performance mode)
As shown in Figure 42, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45(A)).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display will begin at the same time as the start of the variable display, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 will gradually increase, while a fade-in display will begin, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will gradually decrease until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping time approaches for the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-speed displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 fades out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin scrolling until they reach high-speed display (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1, during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in, is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed deceleration begins in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until a temporary stop is displayed (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

Furthermore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in operation, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a lighting pattern of white, blue, and yellow in that order, based on loop lighting control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)). In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second performance mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 43, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45(B)).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display will begin at the same time as the start of the variable display, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 will gradually increase, while a fade-in display will begin, in which the transparency (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will gradually decrease until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping time approaches for the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-speed displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

The fade-out display period A1 for the first background image 002SG081 is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A22 for the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, from the start of scrolling until high-speed display begins (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). This is because, since a shorter fade-out period generally gives the impression of a sudden disappearance, for fade-out displays that may occur at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and background changes (for example, at the start of variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is set to be shorter than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is set to be longer than the fade-in display period B22 during which the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is slowed down to a temporary stop (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). This arrangement allows for a more abrupt appearance of the decorative pattern, as a shorter fade-in period generally creates a more sudden effect. Therefore, for fade-in displays that may occur at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display stops), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 during the second performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 during the first performance mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) and (B)). This design not only differs the scroll display pattern of the decorative symbols in the second performance mode compared to the first, but also lengthens the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display until the display becomes high-speed and the decorative symbols become difficult to see. This allows the decorative symbols to be viewed for a longer period.

In this embodiment, as a variable display of decorative patterns in the second performance mode, a second scroll display is applied, which differs in manner from the first scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the first performance mode. This second scroll display moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back to the front. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The special variable display, which differs in manner from the first scroll display, may not only involve the curvilinear movement of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from back to front as described above, but may also include various other scroll displays, such as the curvilinear movement of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from front to back as described in Modification 1, or a scroll display that moves linearly or curvedly from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 differ depending on whether the non-reach-miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode. This design, where the fade-out display period is the same despite the different performance modes, makes it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach-miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 fades out, and the fade-out display period A22, from the start of scrolling display of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until high-speed display, are different. In other words, by not executing (not synchronizing) the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 at the same time (for example, at the start of variable display), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Specifically, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 will disappear together, making it difficult to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern disappear first, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1, during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in, and the fade-in display period B22, from the start of the deceleration of the display speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the temporary stop display, are different. In other words, by not executing the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 at the same time (for example, when the variable display stops), it is possible to prevent the display of the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to recognize. Specifically, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will appear together, making it difficult to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

Furthermore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in operation, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a lighting pattern of white, blue, and yellow in that order, based on loop lighting control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)). In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 44, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-3 is performed in the third and fourth performance modes, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously displayed in a rotating or scrolling manner without any variation start action being performed. In addition, a shift display of the hold display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45(C)).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping time approaches for decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in these areas simultaneously and gradually decelerate, becoming slow-speed displays. Simultaneously, the transparency (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all stop and are displayed simultaneously. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second performance modes are not executed; the variable display simply ends, and the decorative symbols, along with the smaller symbols, stop and are displayed. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling is performed in the first performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when rotation display is performed in the third performance mode or when scrolling display is performed in the fourth performance mode. Similarly, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first performance mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) to (C)).

Furthermore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in operation, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b illuminate in accordance with the output of the high-bass music's rhythm, melody, and beat, based on the light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. Additionally, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the high-base state, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are shown to illuminate in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-base music, based on the light emission control corresponding to the high-base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the high-base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed based on loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24(B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the light emission control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of demonstration performance while waiting for customers)
Next, the customer waiting demo performance will be explained based on Figures 46 and 47. Figure 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance. Figure 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a starting prize is awarded during the customer waiting demo performance.

As shown in Figure 46, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the game is in a customer waiting (game waiting) state. This effect is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo specification command output from the main board 11, without receiving any control commands such as the variable display start specification command.

Specifically, although not shown in the diagram, after the initial operation of the movable parts 32A, 32B, etc., is performed during the initial operation control process following power-on, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since power-on without any variable display being performed, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 disappears, the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demo sequence, a video is displayed sequentially introducing multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) and content from various sequences (see Figures 46(B) to (E)). Then, while an image of the ally characters gathered together remains displayed (see Figure 46(F)), the movable body 32A descends from its origin position to the sequence position. After a predetermined time has elapsed, it rises back to its origin position (see Figures 46(G) to (H)). Finally, the first background image 002SG081, corresponding to the normal state, is displayed as the background image, and the sequence ends (see Figure 46(I)). Once the customer waiting demo sequence ends, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display indication 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46(J)).

Furthermore, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting demo performance ends without any variable display, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the waiting state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be executed repeatedly multiple times during the waiting state, or it may be stopped after a predetermined number of executions. Also, the presentation style of the customer waiting demo performance as a waiting effect is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, during the customer waiting demo performance (see Figures 46(B) to (H)), the small symbols are continuously displayed in display area 5S, while the decorative symbols are hidden in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, even though the decorative symbols are hidden, the small symbols are still displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

This section explains an example of what happens when a winning combination is triggered while a customer-waiting demo is being performed.

As shown in Figure 47(A), when the customer waiting demo sequence is running and a first starting win occurs (the condition for starting the variable display is met), as shown in Figure 47(B), the variable display of the small symbols begins in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo sequence image 002SG400 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 47(C), the customer waiting demo image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) of the first hold display 002SG101 from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F begins, and the variation start action of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 47(D), when the shift display of the first held display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed, as shown in Figure 47(E), the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R move upward in sequence, ending the variation start action, and the scrolling display begins (see Figure 47(F)).

Thus, when a winning combination occurs while the customer-waiting demo sequence is running, the variable display of the small symbols begins before the customer-waiting demo sequence image 002SG400 disappears. Then, the customer-waiting demo sequence image 002SG400 disappears, and the background image corresponding to the current sequence mode (in this case, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first sequence mode) is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed and scrolling begins.

In other words, if the display of decorative symbols scrolls while the demo image 002SG400 is still displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the scroll display started in conjunction with the first winning combination. Therefore, by starting the variable display of small symbols, switching from the demo image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scroll display only after the hold display shift has finished, the player can be made to recognize that the scroll display started in conjunction with the first winning combination. On the other hand, if the display switches from the demo image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starts the scroll display only after the shift display has finished, the time lag between the first winning combination and the start of the scroll display becomes larger. Therefore, for the small symbols, the variable display starts before the demo image 002SG400 disappears, ensuring that the display corresponds to the variable display of decorative symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 46(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if it is the first or second performance mode, the loop action of the displayed decorative symbols (see Figure 23(C)) is executed, and loop illumination control (see Figure 24(B)) is performed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, if it is the third or fourth performance mode, the loop action of the displayed decorative symbols (see Figure 23(C)) is not executed, and illumination control is performed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

Thus, in a low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is executed repeatedly at a shorter cycle than the loop illumination control, drawing attention to the decorative symbols. This allows for variable display of the decorative symbols, and thus encourages the resumption of gameplay. Conversely, in a high base state, neither the loop action of the decorative symbols nor the loop illumination control is executed, allowing attention to be drawn to the high base state's effects (third and fourth effects modes). The loop action of the decorative symbols does not necessarily have to be executed in the first and second effects modes, nor is it necessary to execute it in the third and fourth effects modes.

Furthermore, the fact that the decorative symbol loop action does not execute while the variable display is stopped in the high-base state suggests that it is unlikely the player would end their game in the high-base state, and that they are simply away from their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to sit down just because it is a non-operational pachinko machine 1 with the variable display not displayed. Moreover, appealing with the loop action would deter other players from mistakenly sitting down.

Furthermore, while the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," it is also possible to implement animations such as a shifting or shimmering highlight on the decorative pattern while it remains stationary, without any changes in its position, movement, or deformation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and other performance images (not shown) such as character images, which are displayed as background images in the high-bass state, may be animated, such as moving and displaying in sync with the high-bass music or at a predetermined movement speed. In this case, although the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed while the variable display in the high-bass state is stopped, the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo-consecutive win notification operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo-consecutive win notification will be explained based on Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo-consecutive win notification. Figure 49 shows (A) an example of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo-consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a pseudo-consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 48, the "pseudo-consecutive display notification" is a feature that, at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, temporarily pauses the display of the decorative symbols. It then entices the player to wonder whether the variable display will resume or not, that is, whether a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 49(A), the pseudo-consecutive win notification can be executed in two ways: a "single pseudo-consecutive win pattern" where the total number of variable displays is two (initial variable display and one re-variable display), and a "double pseudo-consecutive win pattern" where the total number of variable displays is three (initial variable display and two re-variable displays). If the Super Reach (single pseudo-consecutive win) variation pattern is selected, the "single pseudo-consecutive win pattern" is executed; if the Super Reach (double pseudo-consecutive win) variation pattern is selected, the "double pseudo-consecutive win pattern" is executed. The probability of winning a jackpot is higher with the "double pseudo-consecutive win pattern" than with the "single pseudo-consecutive win pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 48(A), when the variable display that executes the pseudo-consecutive win notification is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a near-win state (see Figure 48(B)). Afterward, the pseudo-consecutive win decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is displayed at a reduced speed just before its stopping position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(C)).

Subsequently, in the case of a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win notification is executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol is temporarily displayed at the stopping position in the central symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(D)), and a pseudo-consecutive win count indicator 002SG212, "×2", indicating the start of the first re-variable display, i.e., the start of the second variable display, is displayed above the central symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(F)). The variable display of the symbols then resumes in the left symbol display area 5L, the central symbol display area 5C, and the right symbol display area 5R (see Figure 48(G)). In the case of a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win notification is not executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol passes the stopping position in the central symbol display area 5C, and a symbol with a number one greater than the temporarily displayed symbol is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a losing variable display result (see Figure 48(E)).

In Figure 48(G), after the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a "pseudo-consecutive-win pattern" pseudo-consecutive-win notification, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbols that were being displayed variably in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped (see Figure 48(L)), and decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a reach pattern (see Figure 48(M)), which then develops into an SP reach performance.

Furthermore, in Figure 48(G), after the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of the "two-time pseudo-consecutive-win pattern" pseudo-consecutive-win notification, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, returning to a reach state. After that, the pseudo-consecutive-win decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stopping position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(H)).

Next, the pseudo-consecutive decorative symbols are temporarily displayed at the stopping position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(I)), and a pseudo-consecutive count indicator 002SG213, "×3," indicating the start of the second re-variable display, i.e., the start of the third variable display, is displayed above the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48(J)). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the central decorative symbol display area 5C, and the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 48(K)).

Subsequently, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped (see Figure 48(L)), and decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a reach pattern (see Figure 48(M)), which then develops into an SP reach演出 (SP reach animation).

Furthermore, the pseudo-consecutive win notification includes an introductory part (see Figures 48(A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)) that builds anticipation for whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figures 48(D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)) that announces whether or not the variable display has resumed.

As shown in Figure 49 (B1), in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, after the pseudo-consecutive win symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the central symbol display area 5C, when the variable display resumes, a pseudo-consecutive win count display that can identify the number of times the variable display has resumed is displayed. Specifically, a pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 48 (F) and (G)) indicating "×2" is displayed to indicate that the first re-variable display has started, i.e., the second variable display has started, and a pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 48 (J) and (K)) indicating "×3" is displayed to indicate that the second re-variable display has started, i.e., the third variable display has started.

The pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in Figure 49(B1) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in Figure 49(B2) can be displayed in either blue or red. Furthermore, as explained in Figure 19, regular symbols consisting of even numbers are displayed in blue, while probability-increasing symbols consisting of odd numbers are displayed in red. The display color for these pseudo-consecutive win count displays is determined in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in Figure 18, using the pseudo-consecutive win count display color determination table shown in Figure 49(C).

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when determining the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count indicator 002SG212, if the variable display result is "probability-changing jackpot," a display color that is not identical to the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color is red / symbol color is red and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color is blue) is determined at a rate of 10%, and a display color that is identical to the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color are blue / symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count indicator color are red) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "non-probability-changing jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is red / symbol color is red and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are blue / symbol color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are red) is determined at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is "miss," a display color that is not identical to the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is red / pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 90%, and a display color that is identical to the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are blue / pattern color and pseudo-consecutive win count display color are red) is determined at a rate of 10%.

Thus, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, there are two possible combinations: a first combination where the displayed decorative symbol and the displayed color of the pseudo-consecutive win count are not the same color, and a second combination where the displayed decorative symbol and the displayed color of the pseudo-consecutive win count are the same color. In the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the probability of the game being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when it is restarted with the first combination.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and the stop symbol is determined to be a normal symbol (blue) in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color (blue) for the pseudo-consecutive count display in the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be higher than the probability of determining the different color (red). On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, and the stop symbol is determined to be a normal symbol (blue) in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color (blue) for the pseudo-consecutive count display in the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the probability of determining the different color (red).

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and the probability variation symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color, red, for the pseudo-consecutive count display of the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be higher than the probability of determining the different color, blue. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, and the probability variation symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color, red, for the pseudo-consecutive count display of the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the probability of determining the different color, blue.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see Figure 49 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spins where the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 shows "×2", the second combination ("×2", blue), where the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the numbers and display colors of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type (blue), is determined with a higher probability than the first combination ("×2", red), where the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the numbers of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display colors are different (red).

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, where the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 shows "x3," the third combination ("x3," blue), where the number on the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same (blue), is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3," red), where both the number on the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the display color on the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 are different (red).

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, if the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the proportion of times the same color (blue) is determined for the pseudo-consecutive count display of the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the proportion of times the different color (red) is determined.

When the variable display result is a jackpot, and the probability variation symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spins where the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red), where the decorative symbol displayed at the temporary stop and the numbers in the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same (red), is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue), where the decorative symbol displayed at the temporary stop and the numbers and display color in the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different (blue).

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, where the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 shows "×3", the second combination ("×3", red), where the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop and the numbers and display colors of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are of the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("×3", blue), where the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop and the numbers of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are of the same type but the display color is different (blue).

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, and a normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability of determining the same color, blue, as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive counts will be lower than the probability of determining the different color, red.

In this pseudo-consecutive win notification, there are two possible combinations: a first combination where the numbers on the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo-consecutive win count displays are different; and a second combination where both the numbers and display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo-consecutive win count displays are the same type. In the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the probability of the game being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when it is resumed with the first combination. Therefore, not only is the outcome of the pseudo-consecutive win notification uncertain, but if it is executed, attention can be drawn to the combination of the numbers and colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo-consecutive win count displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when a super-reach variation pattern with two pseudo-consecutive wins is determined than when a super-reach variation pattern with one pseudo-consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when both the decorative symbol temporarily stopped on the first pseudo-consecutive win and the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display are the same type in the second combination, compared to when both are the same type in the second combination, the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is the same type in the second pseudo-consecutive win, the number of pseudo-consecutive wins and the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display can be drawn more attention.

Furthermore, if, during the second pseudo-consecutive spin, both the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop and the number and color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display are the same type in the second combination, the decorative symbol becomes a probability-increasing symbol. Therefore, it may be possible to ensure that the probability-increasing jackpot state is controlled more frequently when a super-reach variation pattern with two pseudo-consecutive spins is determined than when a super-reach variation pattern with one pseudo-consecutive spin is determined.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which the display color for the pseudo-consecutive win count is determined from multiple colors according to the numbers on the decorative symbols displayed during the temporary stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color for the pseudo-consecutive win count may be a predetermined color for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display modes of the pseudo-consecutive count indicators 002SG212 and 002SG213 were exemplified as "×2" and "×3," but the present invention is not limited to these. The pseudo-consecutive count indicator can be changed to various modes as long as the pseudo-consecutive count can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various modes such as "nth consecutive" (where n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time," or "nth re-variation."

In this embodiment, the only two patterns in the pseudo-consecutive win notification where the numbers on the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display are the same type and color are when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 is ("x2", blue), and when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 is (x3, red). However, other patterns may also exist, such as when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive win count display is (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbols, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display, and the pseudo-consecutive win count can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win notification is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification, the system determines whether or not to make the pseudo-consecutive win count display color the same as the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification. While the system exemplified a configuration where the expectation level is higher when the color is the same as the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number on the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number displayed in the pseudo-consecutive win count notification, the system may choose not to determine the pseudo-consecutive win count display color and instead uniformly set it to a predetermined display color (e.g., white).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, after a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol with the words "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby initiating the re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-consecutive win symbols can be changed in various ways. Alternatively, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may begin when the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or the pseudo-consecutive win symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Furthermore, in the pseudo-consecutive win notification, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R do not necessarily have to be the same as the confirmed decorative symbols that are displayed at the end of the variable display. Also, for example, if a normal symbol is temporarily displayed during the first pseudo-consecutive win, a probability-changing symbol (i.e., a different symbol from the first pseudo-consecutive win) may be temporarily displayed during the second pseudo-consecutive win. Moreover, the number of pseudo-consecutive wins is not limited to the two mentioned above; three or more pseudo-consecutive wins (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of a reach animation)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of the reach animation based on Figures 50 to 52. Figure 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach animation. Figure 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach animation following Figure 50. Figure 52 is a diagram showing examples of the operation of each part in the reach animation. In the following, we will explain examples of the operation of the reach animation in the first animation mode, but similar reach animations may be performed in the second to fourth animation modes as well.

As shown in Figure 50(A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variable display (see Figure 50(B)). Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach mode, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 50(C)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. Furthermore, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 24(B)).

Furthermore, while Figures 50(B) and (C) illustrate a configuration in which the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The decorative symbols may be temporarily displayed simultaneously in both the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in Figure 50(D), when the reach animation begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line effect display 002SG250, which serves as a reach line suggestion image, is displayed superimposed on the variable-display decorative symbols (almost transparent and invisible) in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thus initiating the reach line suggestion animation. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stopping positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and suggests that the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C will stop and display on the reach line.

Furthermore, in Figure 50(D), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are not enlarged only for the character in the character display unit 002SG052, as in the variable stop action described above. Instead, the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. By using this enlarged display, which differs from the manner when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to recognize that the variable display has not stopped, but rather entered a reach state.

As shown in Figure 50(D), when the reach effect is initiated, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is initially displayed small, superimposed on the variable-display decorative symbol near the stopping position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. It then gradually extends linearly toward the stopping positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 50(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 50(F)), its appearance changes to expand vertically (see Figure 50(G)), and then its transparency gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 50(H)), finally disappearing and becoming invisible (see Figure 51(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50(F), in the reach line indication effect, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (by enlarging it). Additionally, when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, which are located around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5, are turned off. This makes the area around the display screen darker than usual, thus making the reach line effect display 002SG250 more prominent.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50(D), after the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, the left decorative symbol begins to move to the left, and the right decorative symbol begins to move to the right, that is, in a direction that separates them from each other (see Figure 50(E)). Then, while separating from each other, they rotate by a predetermined angle around a rotation axis that points in the vertical direction (see Figure 50(F)), and when they reach the furthest separated positions on the left and right sides of the display screen, the movement and rotation display ends, and they are temporarily stopped (see Figure 50(G)).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 50(H), the decorative patterns on the left and right, which were displayed at the separated positions while still enlarged, are reduced in size and rotated as they move from the separated positions towards the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are then restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 51(I), when the decorative patterns are restored to the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and hidden, the decorative patterns that were variably displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll speed and transparency, fading in (see Figures 51(J) to (K)). Finally, the transparency of the decorative patterns becomes 0% (opaque), and they are displayed scrolling at a slow speed (see Figure 51(L)).

As shown in Figure 52, the CPU 120 for performance control can perform an enlarged display, which enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separated display, which separates the decorative symbols after the enlarged display has been performed. Since the second period te1, from the start to the end of the separated display, is longer than the first period td1, from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1 < te1), the player can recognize the decorative symbols forming a reach state.

Furthermore, since the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to its end is longer than the period tf1 for the enlarged decorative pattern to be restored to its original state (td2 < tf1), the decorative pattern forming the reach state can be recognized by the player, and when it is restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next animation.

Furthermore, when the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimensions of the central decorative symbol display area 5C, where attention is focused on which decorative symbol will be displayed, narrow, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative symbols. Therefore, by performing a movement display that separates the left and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols, which have entered a reach state due to the enlarged display, are emphasized, and then attention can be quickly drawn to the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

Furthermore, while the example given illustrates the reach line effect display 002SG250 being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thus entering a reach state, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed simultaneously with the entry into a reach state.

Furthermore, while the movable lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Also, it is not limited to turning it off; the brightness may be reduced compared to when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes is illustrated by using movable lamps 9d built into movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light-emitting means is not limited to those provided on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as it is a lamp provided around the image display device 5. For example, it could be a plurality of board-side lamps including the attacker lamp 9c provided on the game board, or the main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b provided on the game machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the timing at which the transparency of the variable-display decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is set to a second transparency F2, which is lower than the first transparency F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, is after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been removed from the central decorative symbol display area 5C. This ensures that the variable-display decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C do not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a form is illustrated in which the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the central decorative pattern display area 5C, and then the transparency of the decorative pattern in the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously with the erasure of the reach line effect display 002SG250 from the central decorative pattern display area 5C, or the transparency may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the erasure of the reach line effect display 002SG250 from the central decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP Reach animation operation)
Next, we will explain examples of the operation of the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出) based on Figures 53 to 55. Figure 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach演出. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach演出 that follows Figure 53. Figure 55 is a diagram showing examples of the operation of each part in the SP Reach演出.

As shown in Figure 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the reach pattern described in Figure 50(C) is reached, the reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP reach performance is displayed, notifying the reach title, and an SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figures 53(B) and (C)). In the SP reach performance, a fifth background image 002SG085 is displayed, which is different from the normal background images, the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082, and represents space corresponding to the SP reach performance. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with different appearances depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, from the moment the battle concludes until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed, the operation prompt display 002SG071, consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072, which mimics the push button 31B, are displayed to initiate the operation (see Figure 53(D)).

Then, when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 disappear, and the process ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color, the movable body 32B rises from its origin position to the performance position, an effect display 002SG073 emphasizing the movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 53(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the allied character has won the battle against the enemy character is shown, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach animation is displayed as the background image, and a combination of symbols that guarantees a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 53(F)).

Then, as shown in Figure 53(G), upon the end of the SP reach sequence, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. While the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that guarantees a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed. Afterward, character 002SG074 appears, holding a lit igniter. After appearing in the frame from the lower right edge of the display screen, the character runs to the left, igniting the number display sections 002SG051 of each decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 53(H)).

As shown in Figure 55(A), the specific image 002SG075, which represents a flame displayed by igniting at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 55(B) to (D), and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051. Furthermore, the flame image constituting the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop of three images with different characteristics (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C), as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 55(D), creating the illusion of a flickering flame. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols stop, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 002SG078, indicating that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 53(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 53(L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 53(M), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. While the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, without displaying the specific image 002SG075, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed in a stopped state, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53(N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach variation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification animation is performed indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 53(E)), and after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, in the notification animation, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach animation is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 54(O)).

Then, as shown in Figure 54(P), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. While the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, a combination of symbols that guarantees a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, without displaying the specific image 002SG075, each decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 002SG078, indicating that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 53(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 54(R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 54(S), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. While the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, without displaying the specific image 002SG075, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed in a stopped state, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54(T)).

Thus, in a low-base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in conjunction with the numerical display section 002SG051 of the jackpot-confirming decorative symbol that was displayed after the notification effect ended, thereby enhancing the effect and creating excitement (see Figures 53(H) and (I)). However, in a high-base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in conjunction with the numerical display section 002SG051 of the decorative symbol that was displayed after the notification effect ended (see Figure 54(S)), thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

In this embodiment, while an example is shown where, in a low-base state, a specific image 002SG075 representing flames is displayed in close proximity to the numerical display section 002SG051 of the winning combination of decorative symbols displayed after the SP reach animation ends, the specific image is not limited to the flame-representing image 002SG075 described above. Other images (e.g., light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

Furthermore, the motion display of a specific image may include not only the flickering of flames as described above, but also the rotation of the specific image around the numerical display unit 002SG051, or changes in its shape or display color.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display unit 002SG051 by the character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 shows (A1) to (A7) as a second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action involved the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 being enlarged when the decorative pattern was temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a moving manner, moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop positions in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 56(A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while slowing down as it approaches the stopping position. When it reaches the stopping position and displays a temporary stop (see Figure 56(A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downwards, passing the stopping position.

In this case, the distance L2 traveled by the numerical display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stopping position until the temporary stop display is shown is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stopping position until the temporary stop display is shown (L1 < L2).

Subsequently, the digit display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052, having passed the stopping position, move upwards. The character display unit 002SG052 temporarily displays at the stopping position (see Figure 56(A5)), while the character display unit 002SG052 again passes the stopping position and moves upwards (see Figure 56(A6)). Thus, the distance L3 traveled from when the digit display unit 002SG051 passes the stopping position upwards until it displays a temporary stop is smaller than the distance L2 traveled from when the digit display unit 002SG051 passes the stopping position downwards until it displays a temporary stop (L3 < L2). Finally, the digit display unit 002SG051 moves downwards and displays a temporary stop at the stopping position (see Figure 56(A7)).

Furthermore, in Figure 56 (A6), the action in which only the character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in nature from the variation start action A4 shown in Figure 23 (A), thus allowing the difference from the variation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches its stopping position, instead of displaying a temporary stop at that moment, the display shows at least some of the multiple display units that make up the decorative pattern moving to the opposite side and returning to the stopping position after passing the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display units have passed by due to momentum, thus adding realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping one of the multiple display units (for example, the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) at the stop position, while allowing the other second display units (for example, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, it is possible to create movement while ensuring that the stop position remains clear. Moreover, by making the travel distances of one of the second display units, the numeric display unit 002SG051, and the other, the character display unit 002SG052, different, it is possible to display actions that match the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 57. Figure 57 shows (A) to (D) as a third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first performance mode, as shown in Figure 21(A2), the decorative symbols before and after the temporarily stopped decorative symbol at the stop position are not temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a losing variation pattern, as shown in Figure 57(B), when any decorative symbol (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (for example, decorative symbols "2" and "4") may also be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, when a variable-display decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 57(A) and (B)), and a variable-stop action is performed (see Figures 57(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable-stop action is performed only on the decorative pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position, and not on decorative patterns temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination of decorative symbols is derived as a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged. This allows the player's attention to the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in these areas, and even when a losing combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept in the area where the decorative symbols are displayed. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols not located in these areas are not enlarged. This allows the player's gaze to be concentrated on the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in these areas, and also reduces the load on the display control.

Furthermore, since loop illumination control continues even when the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 42 and 43), the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Note that if multiple effective stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be performed for the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at each effective stop position.

(Other variations)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode changes to a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, a specific operation including a first predetermined operation in which the left and right decorative symbols forming the reach mode move toward the front of the display screen and a second predetermined operation in which they move toward the back of the display screen may be used to move only the number display unit 002SG051 to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left and right sides of the display screen). In this case, it is preferable that the movement speed of the decorative symbols is faster in the second predetermined operation than in the first predetermined operation.

Furthermore, in a system where the decorative symbols are displayed using the number display unit 002SG051 and the information display unit 002SG053 when the variable display is stopped, the number display unit 002SG051 may be enabled to perform a number variation start action different from that of the scrolling display when the variable display starts. Additionally, the information display unit 002SG053 may be enabled to perform an information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display unit 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed before the number variation start action is completed, causing the information display unit 002SG053 to be erased.

While embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second performance mode can be executed in a low base state, the third performance mode can be executed in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth performance mode can be executed in a high-probability, high-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute three or more performance modes in a low base state, or three or more performance modes in a high base state.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is performed in the first display mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second display mode, a rotating display in the third display mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth display mode, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the manner of variable display of decorative patterns in each display mode can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a scenario where a jackpot state is applied as an example of a favorable state for the player, the present invention is not limited to this. Other favorable states such as a time-saving state, a probability variation state, or a minor win state may also be applied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal state is set to a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to perform variable displays and have a shorter average variable display period than the normal state, are set to a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be set to a low-probability state and the special states to a high-probability state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the present invention was illustrated as being applied to a pachinko game machine 1 that has a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variation state (high probability high base state) as game states, and can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variation state at the end of a big win game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display result was displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low probability state, or a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display was executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state in the low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after a RAM clear (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a big win can be designated as Time-Saving State A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state during a low-probability state after the end of an advantageous state or a RAM clear (cold start of pachinko machine 1) can be designated as Time-Saving State B, and the time-saving state controlled based on a specific result being displayed during a portion of the cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low-probability state can be designated as Time-Saving State C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine capable of controlling the aforementioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results that result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may differ depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

[Examples]
Furthermore, embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display (Figures 75, 76, 95, 96, 97, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the demonstration display in a step-by-step design, allows attention to be drawn to the changes rather than starting everything at once, making the start of the demonstration display noticeable and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
Before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the brightness data table for the normal state background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the special state background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display (Figures 75, 76, 95, 96, 97, 99, 100, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the demonstration display in a step-by-step manner, allows attention to be drawn to the changes rather than starting everything at once, making the start of the demonstration display noticeable and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the demonstration display luminance data table is data that emits light in a different color than the final luminance data used in the normal state background display luminance data table and the final luminance data used in the special state background display luminance data table (Figures 137, 141, 145, 149, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that the color of the last luminance data during normal background display differs from the color of the first luminance data during demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during special background display differs from the color of the first luminance data during demonstration display. As a result, the color change of the light-emitting means is more noticeable when the demonstration display starts in each state, making it easier to understand that the demonstration display has started, and consequently enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first and second periods, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for background display and the luminance data table for demonstration display (Figures 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could mislead the player into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of type 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display.
During the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state, the luminance data table for displaying the background in the special state, and the luminance data table for displaying the demonstration.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table (Figures 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could lead players to mistakenly believe that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by maintaining a consistent mode in both the normal and special states, it is possible to prevent players from being misled in either state, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a first scene and a second scene,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for the first scene corresponding to the first scene.
In the second scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for the second scene corresponding to the second scene.
In the first scene during the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene.
In the second scene during the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (Figures 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could mislead the player into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
One luminance data table is different from the luminance data table used when a promotional effect is performed to prompt the operation of the performance control means, and the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table has less luminance change than the luminance data constituting the promotional effect luminance data table (Figures 154 to 162, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the operation of the performance control device is being prompted. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the operation of the performance control device is being prompted, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first luminance data table is characterized by being composed of luminance data for turning off the lights.
According to this feature, since one brightness data table consists of brightness data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control device, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first light-emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second and third light-emitting means are provided in the game frame (Figure 93, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, although the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means are provided on the game frame, by managing them separately from other light-emitting means provided on the game frame using a different brightness data table, it is possible to suitably design the system to prevent players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The display means displays an indication that the device is starting up after the power is turned on.
The light emission control means is,
At a timing related to displaying an indication that the display means is activated, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display brightness data table.
The third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table at a timing related to displaying an indication that the display means is activated (Figures 104, 106, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for illumination using a luminance data table even before the background display is activated, enabling verification of the illumination mechanism's functionality at startup. Subsequently, the illumination pattern can be seamlessly transitioned to the customer waiting mode, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, a scene displaying a warning, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a different scene from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the warning display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the warning display scene corresponding to the warning display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene, the luminance data table for the title name display, and the luminance data table for the warning display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table (Figure 86, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.

The term "company name" includes the names of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the gaming machine in question.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. However, since information such as company names, model titles, and warnings need to be emphasized, each can be highlighted by using dedicated illumination to differentiate it from other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
There are other scenes between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a different luminance data table is used (Figure 86, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows a common brightness data table to be used for both the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, enabling optimal light emission without increasing capacity, and consequently, optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
The execution period for the model introduction scene, including the first and second model introduction scenes (30 seconds), is greater than the execution period for the company name display scene (10 seconds). The execution period for the model introduction scene, including the first and second model introduction scenes (30 seconds), is greater than the execution period for the warning display scene (5 seconds).
A key feature of this system is that the company name and warning text may appear at times other than during the demonstration.
This feature allows for longer emphasis on scenes introducing the machine or displaying the title name, which are only shown during demonstrations, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a scene different from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
The aforementioned brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine.
The first brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, nor brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (Figures 86, 88, 89, 148-155, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. In particular, to convey company names, using brightness data linked to the display animation allows for emphasis compared to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a title display scene, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a scene different from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period and the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the title name.
The aforementioned brightness data table for the title name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the title name text display on the gaming machine.
The first brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, nor brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (Figures 86, 88, 89, 148-155, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. In particular, to convey the model name, the brightness data is linked to the display animation, allowing it to be emphasized in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the warning display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the warning display scene corresponding to the warning display scene.
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for corporate name display scenes is a more emphasized mode than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for warning display scenes.
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for title name display scenes is more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes (Figure 85, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the transmission of information through text displays in multiple scenarios. To emphasize each type of information, such as company names, machine titles, and warnings, dedicated illumination is used for each. In particular, the illumination patterns for company names and machine titles are emphasized compared to warning scenes, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is the gaming machine described in form 9-1,
The modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for company name display scenes are more emphasized than the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes, and the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for title name display scenes are more emphasized than the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes, are any of the following: (1) modes with frequent flashing; (2) modes with many colors illuminated; (3) modes with a large number of light-emitting means used (Figure 85, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for emphasis on the company name and model title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is the gaming machine described in form 9-1,
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for the corporate name display scene is characterized by being more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for the title name display scene.
This feature allows for greater emphasis on the company name, making it easier for players to understand which company is associated with the gaming machine, and consequently enabling more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene showing the company name and a scene introducing the product model.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the model introduction display scene corresponding to the model introduction display scene.
The plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the corporate name display scene are luminance data configured to be emitted by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means.
The multiple luminance data sets that constitute the luminance data table for the aforementioned model introduction scene are luminance data configured such that the first light-emitting means emits light, but the second light-emitting means does not emit light (Figures 86, 147-155).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, in the scene where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are made to illuminate, and in the scene where the model is introduced, the first light-emitting means illuminates but the second light-emitting means does not. This allows the scene where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using a single luminance data table during the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period.
According to this feature, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, in the scene where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are set to emit light in a dedicated emission mode. In the scenes where the first and second models are introduced, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated emission mode, while the second light-emitting means emits light in a common emission mode. This allows the scene where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow luminance data table.
When a specific effect is performed, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
The rainbow luminance data table used during the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific effect is performed are common luminance data tables (Figures 85, 88, 89, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more spectacular demonstration display by setting the light emission pattern to rainbow. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the light emission pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects performed during gameplay, the system does not require increased capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
When a specific performance that can be executed in the normal state and a special performance that can be executed in the special state are executed, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
The rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period following the end of gameplay in the normal state, the rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period following the end of gameplay in the special state, and the rainbow brightness data table used when specific effects that can be performed in the normal state and special effects that can be performed in the special state are performed are all common brightness data tables (Figures 85, 88, 89, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more spectacular demonstration display by setting the light emission pattern to rainbow. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the light emission pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects that can be performed in normal conditions and special effects that can be performed in special conditions, the system does not require increased capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is the gaming machine described in form 12-1,
The aforementioned specific effects and special effects are characterized by being effects that definitively inform the player that they will be controlled to a favorable state.
According to this feature, the luminance data table used for effects that are guaranteed to be controlled to a favorable state is also used for demonstration displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene that includes a title name display scene,
The aforementioned title name display scene consists of a main title name display part that displays the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that subsequently displays the subtitle name of the gaming machine.
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for the subtitle name display part corresponding to the subtitle name display part at the timing of switching from the main title name display part to the subtitle name display part.
The luminance data table for the subtitle name display part is a luminance data table that uses multiple luminance data to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a manner that is linked to the animation of the subtitle name's text display (Figure 86, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. By illuminating the lighting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed in animation when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the company name associated with the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the game machine's title is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the game machine (Figures 177, 178, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the use of text displays to convey information in multiple scenarios. To emphasize each type of information, such as company names, machine titles, and warnings, dedicated display animations are used for each. In particular, emphasizing the display animations for company names and machine titles compared to warning scenes allows for greater emphasis on these elements, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a title display scene and a warning display scene.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned title name display scene, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed as an animation at a predetermined display position.
After that, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
In the aforementioned warning display scene, warning text for playing the gaming machine is displayed with animation at a designated display position.
Subsequently, warning text messages regarding gameplay are displayed without animation (Figures 177, 178, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by adding a lingering animation to the display of the game title, attention is drawn to the title, while by not using lingering animations for warnings, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display includes a warning display scene,
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned warning display scene consists of a first warning display part that displays a warning text for the first event, and a second warning display part that displays a warning text for the second event.
The background color of the text in the first warning display part and the background color of the text in the second warning display part are different (Figures 90, 91, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased attention to different events by using different background colors, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The background color of the text displayed in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the text displayed in the warning display scene (Figures 90, 91, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased attention when switching between displaying the company name and warnings by using different background colors, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
After the second period ends, the background display is shown again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the demonstration display to the brightness data table for the background display (Figures 107, 108, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the background display in a step-by-step design, prevents an unpleasant feeling after the demonstration display ends, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned normal state has ended, the background display of the normal state will be displayed again.
After the second period in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display will be displayed again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the brightness data table for the demonstration display to the brightness data table for the normal state background display.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the demonstration display to the brightness data table for the special state background display (Figures 107 to 109, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the background display in a step-by-step design, prevents a negative aftertaste when the demonstration display ends. Furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp's illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information (Figures 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn promptly signals that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed.
During the first period after the variable display in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state (Figures 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, both in normal and special states. This switching of the light-emitting means allows for prompt notification that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the termination of the second special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
When the first start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information.
When the second start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (Figures 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control, as the system switches control of the light-emitting means first, regardless of which starting condition is met. This switching of the light-emitting means quickly signals that the starting condition has been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in a more efficient customer waiting control system.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 82, 111, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the switching from the demonstration display to be completed before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, thereby indicating that the activation conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed.
During the first period after the variable display in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the aforementioned special state, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
In the normal state, if the start condition is met while the demonstration display is shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
In the aforementioned special state, if the activation condition is met while the demonstration display is shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 82, 111, 181, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the completion of the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, in both normal and special states. This signals that the activation conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the first activation condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
When the demonstration display is shown and the second activation condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 82, 111, 181, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, regardless of which activation condition is met, regardless of which activation condition is met.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Launching operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
If the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the display will switch from the demonstration display to the background display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display (Figures 116, 117, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn signals that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing mechanism. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of providing gaming services,
Menu operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the system switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the menu is displayed, the light-emitting means is controlled using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display.
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (Figures 118 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn promptly signals that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of providing gaming services,
Menu operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, a demonstration display is shown.
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the system switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
When the menu is displayed, the light-emitting means is controlled using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display.
In the normal state described above, when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
In the aforementioned special state, when the display means is showing the demonstration display, if the menu operation means is operated, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (Figures 118 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, both in normal and special states. This switching of the light-emitting means allows for prompt notification that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
After the second period ends, the switching display is shown, and then the background display is shown.
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the system will switch from the demonstration display to the background display without displaying the switching display (Figures 107 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more abrupt transition when a demonstration display ends due to the passage of time, by inserting a switching display. Conversely, when a demonstration display ends due to an interruption condition, it appears to switch abruptly without an inserting switching display. This contrast highlights the fact that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned normal state has ended, a switching display is shown, and then the background display of the aforementioned normal state is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned special state has ended, the switching display is shown, and then the special state background display is shown.
When the demonstration display is shown in the normal state, if the interrupt condition is met, the system will switch from the demonstration display to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

When the demonstration display is displayed in the aforementioned special state, if the interrupt condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (Figures 107 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control by contrasting the two events: in normal and special states, the termination of a demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing abrupt by inserting a switching display; and the termination of a demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear abrupt without inserting a switching display.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
If a power outage occurs and then the power is restored,
After power is turned on, the background display is displayed without showing the guidance message regarding the performance adjustment at the time the background display starts.
After that, a demonstration display will be shown.
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts, and the background display is displayed.
If a power outage occurs and a power-on process is performed that involves initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment at the timing when the background display starts.
After that, the aforementioned demonstration display is shown,
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts, and the background display is then displayed (Figures 101 and 102).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature suggests that the setup process before a gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). In either case, the staff can check the display in the following order: checking the background display after power-on, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display, thus increasing the efficiency of the checks. Furthermore, when the gaming parlor opens and welcomes players, if a background display is shown, it will be the background display that shows the guidance display. This allows for clear guidance regarding the adjustment of the presentation from the moment the game starts, providing players with a suitable gaming environment, and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, the normal state background display is shown,
In the aforementioned special state, the special state background display is shown,
In the aforementioned normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is restored,
After power is turned on, the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment is not displayed at the timing when the normal state background display starts, and the normal state background display is displayed.
After that, a demonstration display will be shown.
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the normal state background display starts, and the normal state background display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special condition, if a power outage occurs and then the power is restored,
After the power is turned on, the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment is not displayed at the timing when the special state background display starts, and the special state background display is displayed.
After that, the aforementioned demonstration display is shown,
Subsequently, the guidance display is shown at the timing of the start of the display of the special state background display, while the special state background display is displayed (Figures 103 to 106, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
Based on these characteristics, there are two possible states for the setup of a gaming parlor before it opens: a normal state and a special state. To allow players to confirm which state the parlor is in during startup, the system avoids displaying guidance messages in the background to avoid interference. If the background is displayed again afterward, it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed. Therefore, by displaying guidance messages from the moment the background display starts, when the gaming parlor opens and welcomes players, the background display will be the one with the guidance message. This allows for clear guidance regarding adjustments to the game's presentation from the moment players start playing, providing them with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, the normal background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the normal background display is shown.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has finished,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, a special state background display is shown, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the special state background display is shown.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown (Figures 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the end of a variation, regardless of whether it is a normal or special state. Since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, the normal background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the normal background display is shown.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
The normal state background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
The special status background display is displayed without the aforementioned guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
The special status background display is displayed without displaying the aforementioned guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown (Figures 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the change in the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state has ended, and even after the change in the second special identification information has ended, the guidance display is not immediately displayed after the change has ended, preventing unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, effective customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
After the variable display ends,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the production adjustment, the background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed superimposed on the background display by displaying a specific animation.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (Figures 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments by not immediately displaying guidance after the end of a variation. Once the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages players to play in a suitable gaming environment. Furthermore, when displaying guidance immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, using the same animation as when displaying guidance after the end of a variation allows for appealing that guidance has been displayed without incurring additional costs, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the second specified period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the demonstration display is shown after the second specified period has elapsed.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 96, 99, 104, 106, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the fluctuation ends, it may be annoying as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. After the power is turned on, it is the store staff, not the players, who are present, so setting a shorter time allows the store staff to quickly check the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, followed by a power-on process that includes initialization. After the second specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization is performed, the second specific period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 96, 99, 102, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the fluctuation ends, it may be bothersome as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. Cold start (power on with initialization) is the starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff of the gaming parlor can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, a demonstration display is shown after a first specific period has elapsed.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the first specified period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, followed by a power-on process that includes initialization. After the second specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization is performed, the second specific period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 102, 104, 106, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial starting method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display ends and a predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display has ended and the predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after a second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has finished, the demonstration display is displayed again after a predetermined period has elapsed.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after the second specified period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has finished, the demonstration display is displayed again after the predetermined period has elapsed.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 96, 99, 102, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the end of a variation, it may be bothersome as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. Cold start (power on with initialization) is the initial starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff of the gaming parlor can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine. Furthermore, by making the period after the demonstration display is shown once in all situations—after the end of a variation in normal mode, after the end of a variation in special mode, and after a cold start—the demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued (Figures 122 to 124, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for stable notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay, whether during background display or demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the completion of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (Figures 122 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature ensures that the notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay is carried over and executed regardless of whether the game is in a normal or special state, whether it is during background display or demonstration display. This allows for stable notification of specific errors and, as a result, enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If a specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (Figures 122 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for stable notification of specific errors by ensuring that the lamp notification of specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information is carried over and executed during both background display and demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different proportions of colors (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different primary colors in the luminance data between the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for demonstration displays. This enables the system to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different proportions of colors (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for background display to have different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the completion of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The colors that make up a large proportion of the luminance data in the luminance data table for normal background display and the luminance data in the luminance data table for specific errors are different.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors have different proportions of colors (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display to use different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for special state background display to use different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern of the background display, regardless of which background display is being used, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the second period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for demonstration display.
The brightness data for the demonstration display and the brightness data for the specific error have different proportions of colors (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for demonstration displays to have different main colors, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the background display brightness data corresponding to the background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data.
The colors that make up the majority of the background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are different (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the normal state background display brightness data corresponding to the normal state background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state.
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the end of the game in the special state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the special state background.
The colors that make up the majority of the normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are different.
The brightness data for displaying the background of the special state and the brightness data for the specific error have different proportions of colors (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data to use different main colors for luminance data for specific errors and luminance data for normal state background display, and by configuring the luminance data to use different main colors for luminance data for specific errors and luminance data for special state background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, regardless of whether it is a normal or special state, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that the player can see (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for demonstration displays, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to have different light emission operation modes that are visible to the player (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the completion of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that the player can see.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured to have different light emission operation modes that the player can see (Figures 92, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display, and the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for special state background display, so that it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the background display, regardless of which background display is being used, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the second period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for demonstration display.
The luminance data for demonstration display and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light emission means and the light emission operation mode of the second light emission means are different as seen by the player (Figures 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different behavior of the light-emitting means shown to the player depending on whether the brightness data is for a specific error or for demonstration purposes. This makes it possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the demonstration, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the background display brightness data corresponding to the background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data.
The luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for specific errors and the brightness data for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the normal state background display brightness data corresponding to the normal state background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state.
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the end of the game in the special state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the special state background.
The luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player.
The luminance data for displaying the special state background and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ depending on whether the brightness data for a specific error is used or the brightness data for displaying the background in the normal state. By configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ depending on whether the brightness data for a specific error is used or the brightness data for displaying the background in a special state, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, regardless of whether the state is normal or special, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
During the second period, when the specified error occurs, whether the number of game media exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit or the number of game media not exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit, the detection means switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for the demonstration display and controls the light-emitting means at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game media (Figures 92, 121, 122, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for seamless demonstrations of the game balls, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout unit. When the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the light emission means is switched to a mode corresponding to the demonstration display. This enables the demonstration display to be shown without any unnaturalness, standardizes the processing, and as a result, enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
When the specified error occurs during the first period, whether the number of game media exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit or the number of game media not exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit, the detection means switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for background display and controls the light-emitting means at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game media (Figures 92, 121, 122, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the background display to be shown quickly and seamlessly, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout unit. As soon as the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This enables standardization of processing and, as a result, allows for optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the second period, if the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met and the detection means does not detect a game medium for a predetermined period of time, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
When the specific error occurs during the second period, and a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (Figures 92, 121, 122, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while a state where the detection means does not detect anything may indicate a specific error, it could also be due to a ball delay or other issues. Therefore, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is immediately switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the demonstration display. This allows the demonstration display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first period, if the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met and the detection means does not detect a game medium for a predetermined period of time, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
When the specified error occurs during the first period, and a specified period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the system switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for background display and controls the light-emitting means (Figures 92, 121, 122, 135-146, 167-169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while a state where the detection means does not detect anything may indicate a specific error, it could also be due to a ball delay or other issues. Therefore, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is immediately switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any unnaturalness, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko gaming machine).

Next, an embodiment for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following description, the front side of Figure 58 will be considered the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be considered the rear (rear, back view) side. The description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing the player playing the game. Furthermore, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 58 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. The small symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, the right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 (see Figure 78) prompting the player to shoot to the right, and the remaining time-saving display 004SG202 (see Figure 78) indicating the remaining time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable form. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, which is installed in a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to the variable display. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to both the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the first hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the second hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 59). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism having a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where no game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to those described above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball device 6A and the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 59), forming a large prize opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3. Side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. These main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32, which operates according to the effects, is provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 58). The movable body 32 is equipped with a movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. These attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." These main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are composed of LEDs (see Figure 93). Further details about the various lamps will be described later.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 59).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 59).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot remains open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined maximum number of times (e.g., 15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and other components, as shown in Figure 59. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a payout device 004SG031, which is driven to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 004SG032, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls dispensed by the payout device 004SG031 pass. The board can stop the operation of the payout device 004SG031 according to the pattern of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032.

Furthermore, the payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation performed by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-shooting handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the launching device 004SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. Signals indicating whether the touch ring 004SG035 is detected, and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 004SG033, are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, indicating the operation content as appropriate).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the animation based on animation execution instructions from the animation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels; images from higher layers have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images from lower layers have a lower display priority.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 3 images. Additionally, the VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is the area where the image drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create the image to be displaced, and then the displacement image is applied to this image to create the displacement image.

The display image creation area is the area where images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to form a display image for display on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are set to have the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area are set to have a lower display priority than images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5 (display priority: medium), and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are set to have the lowest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: low). In other words, Layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is the middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The Layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing images to display a first interface image, which includes a special symbol hold memory display area 5U that clearly displays the first and second special symbol hold memory counts, at the bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a second interface image, which includes small symbols smaller than the decorative symbols on the display screen and a hold memory count display, at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5.

The Layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area located in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the Layer 3 image rendering area is a rendering area that renders the background display in order to display the background display across the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the image displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 image drawing area (Layer 1 image), the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 2 image drawing area (Layer 2 image), and the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 3 image drawing area (Layer 3 image). In particular, as mentioned above, the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the topmost image on the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area (decorative patterns) have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle layer image on the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area (background display) have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom layer image on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize sound output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 60(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 60(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 60(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has performed a cold start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). A cold start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the data is initialized without restoring the data from before power-on, and the game machine is made capable of performing various processes. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has performed a hot start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). A hot start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the game machine is made capable of performing various processes based on the backed-up data. Since a hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called a power-on without initialization. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, different EXT data is set using the game state specification command. For example, command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variation control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variation control is not (low probability high base state, time-saving state). Command 9502H is the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variation control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving probability variation state). Note that the time-saving probability variation state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability variation state". Command 96XXH is an error specification command that specifies that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and that the error has been cleared.

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the reserved memory count decreases). Command E100H is a customer-waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer-waiting demo (demo performance). Command F100H is a frame status display specification command that specifies the status of each input port (including the on/off state of the touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 60(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is executed may be provided.

Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 61, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 62 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 63(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot state. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 63(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 63(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 63(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 64 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss," specifically when the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," and also to cases where the variable display result is "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" is called the "not a reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "not a reach miss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "a reach" is called the "reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the "not a reach variation pattern" and the "reach variation pattern" are included in the "miss variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" is called the "jackpot variation pattern."

The jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns include normal reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a super reach is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of super reach variation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive wins), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive win), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive wins), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of super reach variation patterns, or two or fewer types, may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the Super Reach variation patterns include: a variation pattern (PB1-2) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-2) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (no pseudo-consecutive spins); a variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-3) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (one pseudo-consecutive spins); and a variation pattern (PB1-4) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (two pseudo-consecutive spins).

As shown in Figure 64, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 65, if the variable display result is a non-probability-changing jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table A from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot A to C, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table B from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is one or less, then the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and using this miss variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern for no shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), and PA2-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) miss). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 2, then the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 30% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table C, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 20% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a high-base state (short-time state or probability-increasing state), the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this losing variation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach loss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern). More specifically, in the losing variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 at a rate of 10%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is illustrated as determining the variation pattern according to the type of jackpot when the result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection ratio of any of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied regardless of the type of jackpot, for example, depending on the game state. By doing so, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern suitable for the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 59 can be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 004SG150, as shown in Figure 66, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 004SG150 shown in Figure 66 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 004SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 004SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 004SG152, a game control timer setting unit 004SG153, a game control counter setting unit 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 004SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 004SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 is provided with a performance control data storage area 004SG190, as shown in Figure 67(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 004SG190 shown in Figure 67(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 004SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 004SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A, as shown in Figure 67(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, two commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (either the first or second reserved memory count notification command)—are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 004SG194A are allocated to store these starting slot entry designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands separately for the first and second special symbol reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 004SG194A when a win occurs at the first start entry slot. Similarly, when a win occurs at the second start entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 004SG194A. During a win, commands from the start entry slot designation command to the hold memory count notification command are transmitted sequentially. Therefore, upon command reception, the start entry slot designation command and the hold memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory, respectively.

As shown in Figure 67(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 004SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 67(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 68, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 69. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 69, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 69 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of stored items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of stored items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of stored items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 69.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 70. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (004SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (004SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (004SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 004SGS102 is not the upper limit (004SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (004SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (004SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (004SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (004SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (004SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 to "2" (004SGS106).

After executing either process 004SGS103 or 004SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 004SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern (004SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values and the start gate buffer value are stored as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 004SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up prize-winning designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (004SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up prize-winning designation command to the performance control board 12 are configured by storing the storage address of the first start-up prize-winning designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up prize-winning designation command to the performance control board 12 are configured by storing the storage address of the second start-up prize-winning designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up prize-winning designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 69.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 configures the settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (004SGS113), for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The pending memory count notification command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 69.

After executing the process in 004SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 70 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 72, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, as displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, the second hold memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 004SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 004SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 004SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS141 is "0" (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is "0". The number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 004SGS141 that the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS141 is "0", and it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is "0". As a result, special symbol games using the second special symbol are started with priority over special symbol games using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 004SGS146, the first special symbol hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special symbol hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special symbol hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special symbol hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 004SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 004SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 62 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004SGS150). In step 004SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the machine is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result will be judged as a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and as a "miss" if it does not.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 004SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 63(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 004SGS154).

In step 004, the type of jackpot is determined by the processing of SGS154. This determines whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. This is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 004, SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 004SGS155, proceed to step 004SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 004SGS150 (step 004SGS150; N), the process in step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol game entries using the first special symbol is "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 004SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 73. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 73 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background display shown on the image display device 5 to another background display, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second performance mode, and the third background display 004SG083 corresponding to the third performance mode. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the game state is the high probability high base state.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 73 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 74, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a hold display update process (step S161) which updates the hold memory display (first hold display 004SG101 and second hold display 004SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents of the start-winning received command buffer 004SG194A, such as a shift display. After the hold display update process is executed, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

Furthermore, in step S161, a pre-announcement setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process. This process involves determining, deciding, and setting for executing a pre-announcement effect (for example, an effect that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when a prize is awarded upon start.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Demo performance control processing)
Next, the operation of the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained. Figures 75 to 77 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of Figure 73. In the demo performance control process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether or not the demo movie display is currently running (step 004 SGS 501). Whether or not the demo movie display is currently running is determined by whether or not the demo movie running flag, which indicates that the demo movie display is currently running, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is not currently running, then it is determined whether or not the menu is currently displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is currently displayed is determined by whether or not the "menu displayed" flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not currently displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on or not (step 004SGS503). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on or not is determined by whether the touch ring on flag, which indicates that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the demo movie to start (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the system is waiting for the demo movie to start is determined by whether or not the demo movie start waiting flag, which indicates waiting for the demo movie to start, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the system is not waiting for the demo movie to start, it is determined whether or not a customer-waiting demo specification command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not a customer-waiting demo specification command has been received is determined by whether or not the customer-waiting demo specification command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the customer-waiting demo specification command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo specification command has been received, a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer to measure the time until the demo movie display starts (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer to measure the time until the guidance display starts (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag indicating that guidance display is waiting to start is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the performance control main process returns.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer-waiting demo designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether or not the power-on designation command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the power-on designation command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has been received, the timer value for the demo movie start wait timer is set to approximately 60 seconds (30000) (step 004SGS508), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), the timer value for the guidance display start wait timer is set to approximately 30 seconds (15000) (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-down recovery command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not a power-down recovery command has been received is determined by whether or not the power-down recovery command reception flag, which indicates the receipt of the power-down recovery command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has not been received, the demo performance control process terminates and the system returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has been received, the system sets a timer value equivalent to approximately 90 seconds (45000) as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS510), sets the demo movie start wait flag (step 004SGS511), sets a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), sets the guidance display start wait flag (step 004SGS513), terminates the demo performance control process, and returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the system is waiting for the demo movie to start, it is determined whether or not termination condition E2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS514). Whether or not termination condition E2 has been met is determined by whether or not the starting prize award command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the starting prize award command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is met, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E3 is met, i.e., whether the touch ring 004SG035 is ON or OFF (step 004SGS515). Whether termination condition E3 is met or OFF is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035, which is specified by the frame state display specification command, has changed from OFF to ON.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether termination condition E4 is met is determined by whether the control of the menu display started in the previous menu display process in step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is not met, the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the guidance display to start (step 004SGS524). Whether or not the system is waiting for the guidance display to start is determined by whether or not the guidance display start wait flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the system is waiting for the guidance display to start, the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and it is determined whether the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0 or not, that is, whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the guidance display start waiting timer began counting (step 004SGS526).

If, in step 004SGS526, it is determined that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0, the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display is not waiting to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is not 0, then it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0 or not, that is, whether a specified time (60 seconds, 90 seconds, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the start of timing by the demo movie start waiting timer (step 004SGS529).

If, in step 004SGS529, it is determined that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if, in step 004SGS529, it is determined that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie execution flag is set (step 004SGS531), a timer value equivalent to approximately 55 seconds (27500) is set as the demo movie timer value for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is in progress, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 have been met, i.e., whether a start-up prize has been awarded, the touch ring 004SG035 has been turned on, or the menu display has started (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timer value of the demo movie timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0 or not, that is, whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of timing by the demo movie timer (step 004SGS536).

If step 004SGS536 determines that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demo performance control process terminates and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if step 004SGS536 determines that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS538), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) (step 004SGS539), the guidance display starts (step 004SGS540), the demo performance control process terminates, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 have been met, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542), the demo movie display is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether or not termination condition E3 has been met, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E4 has been met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is not met, i.e., termination condition E2 is met, the demo performance control process terminates and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 has been met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 has been met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not termination condition 2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS546).

If, in step 004SGS546, it is determined that termination condition 2 is met, i.e., the menu display ends due to a starting prize, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that termination condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether the menu display has finished (step 004SGS548). Whether the menu display has finished is determined by whether the control of the menu display was completed in the previous step S80 menu display process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not finished, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has finished, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is ON, it is determined whether or not termination condition 2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 has been met, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 has not been met, it is determined whether termination condition 4 has been met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not met, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off or not (step 004SGS552). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off or not is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off due to the frame state display specification command.

If, during step 004SGS552, it is determined that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 has been met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

(Type of performance mode)
Next, the types of performance modes will be explained based on Figure 78. Figure 78 shows the configurations of the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), the second performance mode (B1) and (B2), and the third performance mode (C1) and (C2).

As shown in Figure 78 (A1), the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a number display section 004SG051 consisting of a circular number base section and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section 004SG052 displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 004SG051 (not all characters are shown); an information display section 004SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters displayed on the front of the information base section (for example, the character's name in this embodiment); and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG054 that surrounds the number display section 004SG051, the character display section 004SG052, and the information display section 004SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 004SG053 is shown to display the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various other information related to the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052 (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 78 (B1) and (C1), the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in the high base state (for the high base state) consist of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG064 that surrounds the number display section 004SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures from the numbers of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 78, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: a first presentation mode (see Figures 78(A1) and (A2)), a second presentation mode (see Figures 78(B1) and (B2)), and a third presentation mode (see Figures 78(C1) and (C2)). The first presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability, low base state. The second presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability, high base state, and the third presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability, high base state.

As shown in Figure 78(A1), in the first performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background display 004SG081, which depicts a daytime city scene, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 78(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed in the frame from the top edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed out of the frame from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol that is displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" symbol) passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "4" symbol) is displayed in the frame and moves downwards. In other words, when the preceding "3" symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" symbol and the following "4" symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" symbol and the following "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and the display of "0" through "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 screen displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and small symbols. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen display the first reserved display 004SG101 and the second reserved display 004SG102, which correspond to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103, which corresponds to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, small symbols, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes, and therefore their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in Figure 78 (B1), in the second performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second background display 004SG082, which depicts a city scene at dusk, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 78 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by rotation in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, rotating around a rotation axis that faces vertically.

For example, in the second display mode, the decorative pattern has a first face and a second face opposite the first face. The first face displays the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the "3" pattern). On the other hand, when the first face is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed on the second face. In other words, because the base display section 004SG064 has low transparency (is opaque), it is not possible to see through the decorative pattern displayed on the second face from the front (to see it through the decorative pattern from the front).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view). By rotating in the order of the first face, second face, first face, second face, and so on, the numbers increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and the display of "0" through "9" is repeated. In other words, the rotation of the decorative patterns is performed by looping the display of the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, the upper right portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right. The lower left portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a time-saving control remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the number of times the time-saving control will be executed.

As shown in Figure 78(C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the third background display 004SG083, which depicts a night city scene, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 78(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed in the frame from the top edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed out of the frame from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol that is displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" symbol) passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "4" symbol) is displayed in the frame and moves downwards. In other words, when the preceding "3" symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" symbol and the following "4" symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" symbol and the following "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increment from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the upper right corner of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns and sub-patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during the period when decorative patterns are displayed by high-speed scrolling, a predetermined period of time is required for a single decorative pattern to be displayed from the top edge of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R until it is displayed from the bottom edge. In other words, a predetermined period of time is required for a single decorative pattern to be displayed and for that decorative pattern display to end. On the other hand, during the predetermined period, the sub-patterns of losing combinations are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

Furthermore, in the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in the first and third performance modes, and the rotating display in the second performance mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed at a constant speed from the start to the stop of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is shown as an example of a configuration in which it can execute a first performance mode, a second performance mode, and a third performance mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute four or more types of performance modes. In particular, it may be possible to execute multiple types of performance modes corresponding to a single game state (for example, a low probability, low base state).

(Examples of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, examples of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be explained based on Figures 79 to 82. Figure 79 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. Figure 80 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Figure 79. Figure 81 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. Figure 82 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode (A) and the second and third performance modes (B).

Furthermore, in the following diagrams representing the display screen of the image display device 5, lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without labels do not represent images displayed on the screen, but are intended to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in the first performance mode)
First, we will explain examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the first performance mode, based on Figures 79 and 80.

Figure 79(A) shows the state in the first performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 004SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 004SG101 (first hold memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 79(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 79(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display is started in which the two first held displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 004SG103 (see Figure 79(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 79(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 79(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 79(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins.

As shown in Figure 79(E), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 004SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the action (character reversal) of the decorative symbol displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is completed, and the upward action begins. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 79(F), downward movement begins, and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 79(F), the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R completes its (character inversion) and begins its upward movement. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 79(G), it begins to move downward and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 79(G), the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C (character reversal movement) ends and the upward movement begins. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 79(H), the downward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins in that order. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 004SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols do not scroll, a variation start action is performed in which the characters reverse, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has started. The operation mode of the variation start action can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 79(F) and (G), is initially displayed at low speed, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 79(H), and then becomes high speed as shown in Figures 80(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transparency also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speeds. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 79(G) to 80(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then progress to a medium speed, and finally to a high speed, with a fade-out display being implemented where the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the third performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the third performance mode will be explained based on Figure 81.

Figure 81(A) shows the state in the third performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 004SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 004SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, in front of them (on a higher layer). (See Figure 81(A))

Next, as shown in Figure 81(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 81(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 81(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 004SG103 (see Figure 81(C)). Furthermore, the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 81(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 81(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 81(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 81(C), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 004SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 81(D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 004SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when scrolling begins, the decorative patterns in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the images also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency reaches approximately 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 81(E) and 81(F), the decorative patterns in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially displayed at low speed, then progress to medium speed as shown in Figure 81(G), and finally to high speed as shown in Figure 81(H). As the transparency increases with speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually distinguish each decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the decorative pattern is set to a first value (0%) when the pattern is stationary, and gradually increases when variable display starts, finally reaching a second value (90%) during high-speed scrolling display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value is the minimum value of the transparency, and should be any value at which the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, if the pattern is most clearly displayed when the transparency is 5%, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. Similarly, the second value is the maximum value of the transparency, and should be any value at which the decorative pattern is almost invisible. For example, if the pattern is almost invisible when the transparency is 100%, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. In short, the first and second values can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the CPU 120 for performance control is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols and prevents the scrolling display of the decorative symbols from starting until the shift display that switches the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. It is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command). Therefore, even when variable displays are executed based on different types of variable display patterns, a common shift display is performed, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs a change start action for the decorative symbols and does not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it does not perform a change start action for the decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it may perform a change start action for the decorative symbols and not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, even in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. Since it is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command), a common shift display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which, after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. As long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is in operation.

(Operational behavior of each part when variable display starts)
As shown in Figure 82(A), in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-moving displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period is the same for all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Next, as shown in Figure 82(B), in the second and third performance modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins. Simultaneously, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin rotating or scrolling without any variation start action. Furthermore, a shift display of the hold display is performed, and after this shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping time approaches for decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in these areas simultaneously and gradually decelerate, becoming slow-speed displays. Simultaneously, the transparency (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all stop and are displayed simultaneously. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second performance modes are not executed; the variable display simply ends, and the decorative symbols, along with the smaller symbols, stop and are displayed. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling is performed in the first performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when rotation display is performed in the second performance mode or when scrolling display is performed in the third performance mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21. See Figures 82(A) and (B)).

Furthermore, in the first performance mode, regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the appearance will be as shown in Figure 82(A). Similarly, in the second and third performance modes, regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the appearance will be as shown in Figure 82(B).

(Example of SP Reach animation operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP Reach演出 (SP reach animation) will be explained based on Figures 83 and 84. Figure 83 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach animation in a low base state. Figure 84 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach animation in a high base state. Note that Figure 84 explains an example of the operation of the reach animation in the third animation mode, but it is also possible to execute a similar reach animation in the second animation mode, or to execute a different reach animation.

As shown in Figure 83(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a low base state, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether to execute a step-up performance in which multiple characters appear in stages, and whether to display a specific step-up performance display pattern (see Figure 83(B)) in which the background display becomes rainbow-colored at a predetermined step in the step-up performance, indicating a confirmed jackpot. If the execution of the step-up performance and the display of the specific step-up performance display pattern are decided, the step-up performance is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up performance display pattern is displayed at the predetermined step (see Figure 83(B)). If it is decided not to execute the step-up performance, or if it is decided to execute the step-up performance but the display of the specific step-up performance display pattern is not decided, a step-up performance display pattern that does not include a rainbow background is displayed.

Next, after the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach pattern, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 83(C)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070, which indicates the type of SP reach performance, is displayed, notifying the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 83(D)). In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081, the normal background display, and represents space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see Figures 83(E) and (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with different modes depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, from the moment the battle concludes until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed, the operation prompt display 004SG071, consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and a button display 004SG072, which mimics the push button 31B, are displayed to initiate the operation (see Figure 83(G)).

Then, when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the operation prompt display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 disappear, and the process ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color, the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, an effect display 004SG073 emphasizing the movable body 32 is displayed, and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 83(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the allied character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP Reach演出 is displayed as the background display. After the combination of symbols that guarantee a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 83(I)), as the SP Reach演出 ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that guarantee a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed, after which the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 83(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 004SG078, indicating that the ally character lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 83(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 83(L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 83(M), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 83(M)).

Next, as shown in Figure 84(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether or not to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern (see Figure 84(D)) in which a specific character appears and the background display becomes a rainbow pattern indicating a confirmed jackpot, and stores the determination result.

Then, after the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach pattern, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 84(B)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070, which indicates the type of SP reach performance, is displayed, notifying the reach title. Then, the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 84(C)).

Here, if a specific cut-in animation display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, the reach title display 004SG070 will be displayed, and then the cut-in animation will begin with the specific cut-in animation display pattern (see Figure 84(D)). If it is determined that the cut-in animation will not be performed, or if it is determined that the cut-in animation will be performed but the display of the specific cut-in animation pattern is not determined, a cut-in display with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed.

Furthermore, during the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出), a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 (normal background display) and represents space corresponding to the SP Reach演出 (see Figures 84(E) and 84(F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with different characteristics depending on the type of SP Reach演出.

Furthermore, the flow shown in Figures 84(G) to (M) is almost identical to that in Figures 83(G) to (M), except for the third background display 004SG083 for high base in Figures 84(J) and (M). Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute a specific step-up performance with a rainbow background in a low base state (see Figure 83(B)) and a specific cut-in performance including a rainbow background in a high base state (see Figure 84(D)) as a specific performance to announce a confirmed jackpot. Although the backgrounds of the specific step-up performance and the specific cut-in performance are both rainbow-colored, their display patterns differ; however, the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and side lamps are the same. In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the illumination of the panel lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), thus reducing the data capacity required for illumination.

(Customer waiting demo performance [Demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demo presentation will be explained based on Figures 85 to 91. Figure 85 shows (A) the start and end conditions for the demo movie display, and (B) the configuration of the demo movie display. Figure 86 shows an example of the operation of each part during the demo movie display. Figure 87 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo presentation. Figure 88 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 89 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 90 shows an example of the display of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). Figure 91 is a diagram comparing the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect used by the effect control CPU 120 to notify the player that the game is in a waiting state, meaning it is not currently playing any games (e.g., variable display, jackpot games, or minor jackpot games). This is primarily achieved by displaying a demo movie on the image display device 5 (see Figures 88 and 89).

The demo movie display, which shows a different background than the one displayed during gameplay, is intended to inform players that a machine is vacant and not currently being played. It consists of scenes such as a company name indicating the company associated with the machine, a machine introduction scene explaining the story, characters, effects, and specifications of the pachinko machine, a machine introduction scene displaying the title and subtitle of the pachinko machine, and a warning scene before gameplay, outlining important points to remember while playing. Furthermore, the demo movie display can be modified in various ways; for example, the machine introduction scene may include explanations of effects and machine specifications.

As shown in Figures 85(A) to 87, the "customer waiting demo performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is started when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any of the following start conditions S1 to S6 have been met. Specifically, start condition S1 is met when one hour (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 upon the end of the variable display; start condition S2 is met when two hours (for example, 60 seconds) have elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on accompanied by initialization; and start condition S3 is met when three hours (for example, 90 seconds) have elapsed since receiving the power-up recovery designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on without initialization. The conditions are met as follows: Start condition S4 is met when the fourth hour (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) turned off; Start condition S5 is met when the fifth hour (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen display ended; and Start condition S6 is met when the sixth hour (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display, which has gone through conditions S1 to S5, ended (from the second week onwards, similar to condition S6, the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the customer waiting demo performance ends).

Furthermore, the "demo movie display" terminates when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any of the following termination conditions E1 to E4 have been met. Specifically, termination condition E1 is met when the end time (e.g., 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started; termination condition E2 is met when a start-up win occurs; termination condition E3 is met when the touch ring 004SG035 is detected as being ON; and termination condition E4 is met when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

Furthermore, even when the demo movie is not being displayed, if the above termination conditions E2 to E4 are met while the timer is being set for the 1st to 6th hours during the waiting period for the above start conditions to be met (demo movie start waiting period), the timer will be stopped. Subsequently, when the above start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are met, the timer will be reset (re-set).

Furthermore, during the waiting period for the demo movie to start, the demo movie display is not shown. However, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed on the various background displays as guidance for adjusting the effects (see Figures 94 (A4) and 180).

Furthermore, the guidance displays for adjusting the effects may include not only menu guidance displays 004SG401, which guides the operation of push button 31B to display a menu screen that allows for the customization and reset of various effects functions such as the vibration function, V-flash function, auto button function, and effects mode provided on push button 31B, and volume/brightness guidance displays 004SG402, which guides the operation of buttons for adjusting volume and brightness, but also guidance displays for adjusting effects functions other than those mentioned above.

Furthermore, if termination condition E3 is met, termination condition E2 is almost never met. In other words, since the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated for a starting prize to occur, termination condition E3 is generally met before termination condition E2. However, in the following irregular cases, termination condition E2 may be met without termination condition E3 being met.

Irregular Case 1: If a "grape" (a ball jam between the pins) occurs, the player calls a staff member. However, if the demo movie starts playing before the staff member arrives, and then the grape is cleared, resulting in a starting win, the demo movie ends without the player operating the ball-shooting handle 30. Therefore, termination condition E2 is met instead of termination condition E3.

Irregular Case 2: If a malfunction occurs in CPU 103 or the CPU 120 for performance control, and the CPU 120 for performance control cannot confirm the touch sensor's ON state, a starting win may occur even though the touch sensor's ON state cannot be confirmed. Therefore, termination condition E2 is met instead of termination condition E3.

Furthermore, termination condition E3, which is met when the touch sensor is on, does not necessarily need to be set as a termination condition. In such cases, the demo movie display will not end with steering wheel operation alone; rather, termination condition E2 will be met and the demo movie display will end when a starting prize is awarded.

As shown in Figure 85(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes: Scene 1 through Scene 4. Specifically, Scene 1 is the "Company Name" section (Company Name Part), which displays the names and slogans of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the product (see Figures 88(A) and 88(B)).

The second scene consists of "Machine Introduction 1" to "Machine Introduction 3" parts (Machine Introduction 1 to 3 parts) which introduce the story of the performances that take place in the pachinko game machine. In "Machine Introduction 1" part (Machine Introduction 1 part), the allied characters and their names that appear in the performance are displayed (see Figures 88 (C) to (F)). In "Machine Introduction 2-1" part (Machine Introduction 2-1 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 88 (G) and (H)). In "Machine Introduction 2-2" part (Machine Introduction 2-2 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 88 (J) and (K)). In "Machine Introduction 2-3" part (Machine Introduction 2-3 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 89 (M) to (O)). In the "Model Introduction 3-1" section, between the "Model Introduction 2-1" section and the "Model Introduction 2-2" section, the cut-in displays of allied characters are shown without text (see Figure 89(I)). Similarly, in the "Model Introduction 3-2" section, between the "Model Introduction 2-2" section and the "Model Introduction 2-3" section, the cut-in displays of allied characters are shown without text (see Figure 89(L)).

The third scene consists of a "Machine Name Main Title" section (main title section) and a "Machine Subtitle" section (subtitle sections 1 and 2), where the main title of the pachinko machine is displayed (see Figures 89 (P) to (V)). The "Machine Main Title" section displays the main title, "FEVER POWERRFUL," while the "Machine Subtitle" section displays the subtitle, "II/All Together Ver."

Furthermore, the "Main Title Name" is the main theme of the pachinko machine 1, a concise expression of its theme. The "Subtitle Name" is the secondary title of the pachinko machine 1, and can be supplementary information added to the main title (for example, "II" indicating it's the second installment, or the heading "All Together Ver."). The content can be changed in various ways.

The fourth scene consists of a "Warning 1" part (Warning 1 Part) and a "Warning 2" part (Warning 2 Part) that provide warnings to the player (see Figures 89 (W) to (X)). Specifically, "Warning 1" part displays warnings to prevent excessive gaming, while "Warning 2" part displays warnings to prevent physical accidents caused by the pachinko machine.

As shown in Figure 86, the demo movie display shows various demo images in the order of the first scene, second scene, third scene, and fourth scene after the start condition is met. The display period tb2a for the first scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2a = 10 seconds), the display period tb2b for the second scene is approximately 30 seconds (tb2b = 30 seconds), the display period tb2c for the third scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2c = 10 seconds), and the display period tb2d for the fourth scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2d = 5 seconds), so the display period tb for one demo movie display is approximately 55 seconds (tb2 = 55 seconds). Then, as shown in Figure 87, if the first demo movie display ends without the termination conditions E2 to E4 being met during the display of the demo movie, that is, if the first demo movie display which started with the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5 ends with termination condition E1, the system proceeds to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6 hours) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is considered met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are met.

During the period when the demo movie is displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the reserved memory count and small symbols is maintained (see Figures 88 and 89). In this embodiment, the reserved memory count and small symbols are shown while the demo movie is displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory count and small symbols may be hidden while the demo movie is displayed.

Furthermore, during the period when the demo movie is displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the illumination of the panel lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b) based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e based on the brightness data table for white illumination (default) that does not correspond to the demo movie display (lamp data table described later: button white illumination). Also, while background music is not output from speakers 8L and 8R, music for the demo movie display may be output.

The brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (the lamp data table described later: customer waiting demonstration) consists of multiple brightness data tables (grandchild tables described later).

For details, the main lamp 9a, which constitutes the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (the lamp data table described later: customer waiting demonstration), has brightness data tables corresponding to the period of the company name section, the period of the model introduction section 1 to the period of model introduction sections 2-3, the period of the main title section, the period of subtitle section 1, the period of subtitle section 2, and the period of warning section 1 to the period of warning section 2. Light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

Furthermore, the system includes luminance data tables (grandchild tables, described later) for the side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, and decorative lamps 9f that constitute the luminance data tables for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data tables, described later: customer waiting demonstrations). These tables correspond to the periods of the company name section, the model introduction 1 section, the model introduction 2-1 section, the model introduction 3-1 section, the model introduction 2-2 section, the model introduction 3-2 section, the model introduction 2-3 section, the main title section, the subtitle section 1, the subtitle section 2, and the warning section 1 to warning section 2. Light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table for each period.

Furthermore, the control using the luminance data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of demo movie display operation)
Next, examples of the demo movie display operation will be explained based on Figures 88, 89, and 176 to 178. Figure 176 shows examples of the operation of text display and illumination patterns in each scene, with (A1) to (A4) being diagrams. Figure 177 shows examples of the operation of the first scene (A), the third scene (B), and the fourth scene (C). Figure 178 is a comparison table showing text animation display.

Furthermore, an example of the expression used to indicate the display method in the following explanation is provided.
"Fade-out display" increases the transparency of the displayed image over time, while "fade-in display" decreases the transparency of the displayed image over time.

"Animated display" refers to a dynamic display (video display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. This change in visibility is achieved by altering at least one of the following: position, size, color, or transparency, compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays involving image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarging display," "shrinking display," "frame-in display," and "frame-out display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display," where the display characteristics, such as color tone, change. In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed in one second of video is 30, meaning the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of "animated display." It refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) where the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous frame, resulting in no change in the display format whatsoever.

Furthermore, an example of an expression used to describe the light emission pattern in the following explanation will be provided.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of the brightness data. Compared to the flashes described below, the change in brightness between each data point is smaller. For example, the brightness of the lamp increases at a predetermined interval, the color changes at a predetermined interval, or a predetermined color moves within the light emission area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp lit continuously would be a dull element of the effect, or when you want to emphasize the image display device 5 or other elements more than the lamp, as in the flashes described below, and you want the lamp to not stand out too much.

"Flash" is a light emission pattern that alternates between high-luminance data and low-luminance data (including off). By varying the intensity of the light, it can significantly alter the brightness perceived by the player, and is a light emission pattern used for emphasis.

The "Rainbow" pattern is commonly used when the display shown in Figure 83(B) is executed in a low base state, and when the effect shown in Figure 84(D) is executed in a high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used, which creates a wave-like illumination by sequentially changing the brightness data of seven colors. However, a rainbow flash pattern may also be used, where low-brightness (including off) brightness data is alternately used between the brightness data while sequentially changing the brightness data of seven colors.

As shown in Figures 88(A) and (B), when the conditions for starting the demo movie display are met, the display of the first scene begins. Note that, as will be described later, depending on the start conditions, a transition display may be shown before the display of the first scene begins. In the first scene, a background display for the company name 004SG301 consisting of white text is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302, mainly consisting of a blue company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B, is displayed in the center of the screen in a "small" size. Then, it gradually enlarges while decreasing transparency and fades in, making it appear as if the company name display 004SG302 is moving from the back to the front of the display screen. The display area 5S in the upper left of the display screen remains showing the number of reserved symbols and small symbols. In this way, even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the small symbols are still displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) change their illumination pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may increase or their color may change.

To explain in detail using Figure 177(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in a "small" size in the center of the screen. Then, for approximately 3 seconds, it gradually enlarges while fading in and decreasing in transparency (see Figure 177(A1)). When it reaches the designated position, a bounce display is shown, where the company name display 004SG302 appears to have hit a wall and bounced back before reappearing in the designated position (see Figure 177(A2)). Finally, it remains statically displayed in the designated position in the center of the screen for approximately 4 seconds (see Figure 177(A3)), and then fades out for 1 second (see Figure 177(A4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then illuminate in white. This white flash at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes the start of the company name display 004SG302 display. Then, the brightness increases in conjunction with the company name display 004SG302 fading in while expanding (white fade-in illumination), flashes white in conjunction with the bounding display of the company name display 004SG302, then illuminates in white, and finally decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out illumination).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to display, the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the text displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character will sequentially fade in (animate display), and the effect display 004SG502 will be displayed in the background (see Figures 88(C) to (F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176(A2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will light up in the color corresponding to each character before lighting up white, in accordance with the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of their names.

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to display, the enemy character 004SG510A, which appears in various scenes, is displayed in animation, and the text "The enemy is rampaging through the city!" 004SG511A fades in (animates) (see Figures 88(G) and (H)). Then, when the "Machine Introduction 3-1" part begins to display, the background display 004SG503 showing the city and the ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the ally character flying through the city to the scene is shown (see Figure 88(I)).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-2" section of the second scene begins to display again, the allied character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the text display 004SG511B, which reads "Protect the city from the enemy!", are faded in (animated display) (see Figures 88(J) and (K)). Then, when the "Machine Introduction 3-2" section begins to display, the allied character 004SG500A is enlarged, and a cut-in display with the effect display 004SG504 in the background is shown (see Figure 88(L)).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-3" section of the second scene begins displaying again, an image of allied character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting, along with the text "Don't lose!" (004SG511C), fades in (animates) (see Figures 89(M) to (N)). Afterward, all allied characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D, along with the text "All together!" (004SG511D), fade in (animates) (see Figure 89(O)).

Furthermore, while the animations for the allied characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene involve actions such as enlarging, shrinking, and fighting, the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D and 004SG511A-004SG511D use animations that result in less noticeable changes in visibility compared to the animated displays of the allied characters 004SG500A-004SG500D.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176 (A2), in the second scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash green when "Model Introduction 3-1" and "Model Introduction 3-2" are displayed, but basically they are lit in a white wave pattern. The lighting pattern (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D and 004SG511A to 004SG511D. Rather, the lighting pattern (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animation display of friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy characters 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, and punching.

Specifically, for example, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may light up, flash, or change color in accordance with the movements of allied characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, or punching.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the main lamp 9a may also be made to change its illumination pattern, similar to the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Next, when the third scene begins to display, the effect display 004SG505 appears in the background, and the main title name display 004SG520A, consisting of the words "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed in the center of the display screen (default display position) in a "small" size. Then, it gradually enlarges while decreasing its transparency and fades in (animates), making it appear as if the main title name display 004SG520A is moving from the back to the front of the display screen (see Figures 89(P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, consisting of the letters "II," is displayed in "extra-large" size to the right of the model main title name display 004SG520A (the default display position). It then fades in, slightly shrinking and decreasing in transparency, and bounces in "large" size to the right of "FEVER POWERRFUL" (the default display position) (see Figures 89(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, consisting of the text "All Together Ver.", is displayed in "extra-large" size in the center in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A (the standard display position). It then shrinks slightly and moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (the standard display position), bouncing back to "large" size (see Figures 89(U) to (V)).

Furthermore, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) basically light up in a rainbow (rainbow-colored) wave pattern, and the lighting pattern changes in conjunction with the animation display of the machine subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C. In particular, in the "Machine Subtitle Name" section, when the machine subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C moves and bounces to the designated display position, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash (blink).

Using Figure 177(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, consisting of the text "All Together Ver.", will be explained in detail. After being displayed in "extra-large" size in the center in front of the main title name display 004SG520A (the designated display position) (see Figure 177(B1)), it will move to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (the designated display position) while slightly shrinking over approximately 0.5 seconds, bouncing and displaying in "large" size (see Figure 177(B2)), and then remaining static at the designated display position for 0.5 seconds (see Figure 177(B3)). Subsequently, the entire model title name display 004SG520, consisting of the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C, will gradually and slowly enlarge (animated) over approximately 1.5 seconds (see Figure 177(B4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a rainbow pattern (rainbow wave illumination) when the main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and when the subtitle name display 004SG520B and subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, they flash white in conjunction with the enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then illuminate in a rainbow pattern (rainbow wave illumination).

Next, when the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins to display, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is shown, and the fall prevention display 004SG312 fades in (animates) in the center of the screen (see Figure 89(W)). Then, when the "Warning 2" part begins to display, the display switches to a black warning background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is shown (see Figure 89(X)).

Using Figure 177(C), the display of the "Warning 1" part will be explained in detail. When the display of the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 is displayed at the designated display position in the center of the screen, fading in (animated display) for 0.5 seconds (see Figures 177(C1) and (C2)). Subsequently, after the transparency of the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 becomes 0% (see Figure 177(C3)), it is displayed statically for 2 seconds (see Figure 177(C4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312 in the "Warning 1" and "Warning 2" parts, but instead continuously illuminate in a white wave pattern in the fourth scene.

Furthermore, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not change their illumination pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312. Therefore, the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312 is not displayed more prominently than the company name display 004SG302, the main title name display 004SG520A, and the subtitle name displays 004SG520C and 004SG520C.

(Comparison of display methods for each scene)
Next, based on Figure 85(B), and referring to Figures 88 and 89, we will compare the display modes of the image display device 5 for each scene during the demo movie display.

<Display Pattern at the Start of Text Display> In Scene 1 (Company Name), Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1 & 2), Scene 3 (Model Main Title, Model Subtitle), and Scene 4 (Warning 1), various texts are displayed with a fade-in (animated) effect. However, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 2), various texts are not displayed with a fade-in (animated) effect.

<Text Animation Display (Degree of Visibility Change)> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), the animation display shows a "large" degree of visibility change. In Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1, 2), the animation display shows a "medium" degree of visibility change. In Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 1), the animation display shows a "small" degree of visibility change. However, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 2), the text display is not animated.

<Text Size> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Model Title), the text is initially displayed in "Small" size before being enlarged to "Large" size. In Scene 4 (Warning 1 & 2), the text is initially displayed in a consistent "Small" or "Medium" size. Furthermore, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1 & 2), the text is displayed in "Medium" size, and in Scene 3 (Model Subtitle), the subtitle text is initially displayed in "Extra Large" size before being reduced to "Large" size.

<Background Color> In the first scene (company name), the background color is white; in the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the background color is a color corresponding to the story; in the third scene (main model title, sub-model title), the background color is a color corresponding to the title; and in the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue, and the warning 2 part is black.

Furthermore, regarding text display, for example, animations tend to be more emphasized than non-animated text; greater changes in visibility during animations result in greater emphasis than small changes in visibility; and text with more colors is more emphasized than text with fewer colors.

As shown in Figure 85(B), the animation of the company name display 004SG302, which consists of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B, displayed in the first scene (company name), involves the text fading in, then bouncing, and expanding in size. In contrast, the animation of the anti-collision display 004SG312, displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), fades in, but its size remains "medium" and does not change. Therefore, the animation of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animation of the anti-collision display 004SG312, meaning that the degree of change in the visibility of the text is greater.

Furthermore, in the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), the animation displays of the main title name 004SG520A, subtitle name 004SG520B, and 004SG520C show the text fading in to a predetermined position, and then expanding, contracting, or moving in size. In contrast, the animation display of the anti-immersion display 004SG312 shown in the fourth scene (warning 1) simply shows the text fading in to a predetermined position, and then does not expand, contract, or move in size. Therefore, the animation display of the company name 004SG302 is considered to be more emphasized than the animation display of the anti-immersion display 004SG312, meaning that the degree of change in the visibility of the text is greater.

Here, we compare the text animation displays in the first scene (company name), the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1), based on Figures 177 and 178.

As shown in Figure 178, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is displayed with an enlarged fade-in at the start of display (see Figure 177(A1)), bounces when it reaches the specified position (see Figure 177(A2)), and remains static after reaching the specified position (see Figure 177(A3)). In the third scene (machine main title name), the machine main title name display 004SG520A is displayed with an enlarged fade-in at the start of display, then remains static when it reaches the specified position (see Figures 89(P) to (R)), and enlarges after reaching the specified position (see Figure 177(B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are enlarged and then reduced at the start of display (see Figures 177 (B1) and (B2)), displayed statically at the designated position (see Figure 177 (B3)), and enlarged after the designated position (see Figure 177 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 fades in at the start of display (see Figures 177 (C1) and (C2)), displayed statically at and after the designated position (see Figures 177 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is as follows: Company Name ≥ Model Title (Main, Sub) > Warning. Warnings only use a fade-in display at the start of the display, and there is no animation at or after the designated display position, resulting in a low degree of emphasis. On the other hand, the company name uses animation at two points: at the start of the display and at the designated display position, resulting in a higher degree of emphasis than warnings. Similarly, the model title (main, sub) also uses animation at two points: at the start of the display and after the designated display position, resulting in a higher degree of emphasis than warnings.

As described above, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text. To emphasize each piece of information—such as the company name, machine title, and warnings—dedicated animations can be used for each. Among these, emphasizing the animations for the company name and machine title compared to the warning scene (Warning 1) effectively highlights these elements, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are faded in to their designated positions, and then animated to enlarge, shrink, or move their size. In contrast, in the fourth scene (warning 1), the anti-addiction display 004SG312 is faded in to its designated position, and then displayed without any animation to enlarge, shrink, or move its size.

In this way, by adding a lingering animation to the display of the machine title, attention is drawn to the title, while by avoiding the lingering animation for warnings, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Comparison of company names and warning display styles)
Here, we compare the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2), the number of reserved items, and the small symbols based on Figures 90 and 91.

As shown in Figure 90(A), in the first scene (company name), the background display 004SG301 for the company name is displayed, and the company name display 004SG302, consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B, is displayed in the center of the screen. The display area 5S located in the upper left of the display screen displays the number of reserved items and small symbols.

As shown in Figure 90(B), in the fourth scene (Warning 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an anti-addiction display 004SG312 is animated and displayed in the center of the screen. The anti-addiction display 004SG312 consists of a heading display 004SG313 with the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation," and a horizontally elongated rectangular heading frame display 004SG314 that serves as the background for the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in Figure 90(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is switched to display, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is also displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 consists of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A consists of an illustration 004SG323A showing a situation where a player hits their head on the protruding part at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Caution: Head Overhead," a detailed warning display 004SG325A consisting of the words "The top protrudes. Please be careful not to hit your head," a warning mark 004SG326A consisting of a triangular mark with an exclamation mark inside, and a attention mark display 004SG327A consisting of an "x" mark.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B consists of an illustration 004SG323B showing a situation where a player's fingers may get caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the casing, a heading 004SG324B with the words "Caution: Finger Pinching," a detailed warning 004SG325B with the words "The stick is moving. Please be careful not to pinch your hands or fingers," a warning mark 004SG326B with an exclamation mark inside a triangular mark, and a attention mark 004SG327B with a downward arrow.

As shown in Figure 91, in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A has medium-sized characters and is chromatic (blue), the company logo display 004SG302B has large-sized characters and is chromatic (blue), and the background display for the company name 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In Scene 4 (Warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is medium-sized and achromatic (white), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue). Furthermore, the border of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Furthermore, the background for the text display of the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which covers the entire display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314, which is provided on a portion of the display screen.

In Scene 4 (Warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A is large in size and achromatic (white) in color; the text of the heading display 004SG324A is medium in size and achromatic (white); the text of the detailed warning display 004SG325A is small in size and achromatic (white); the warning mark 004SG326A is medium in size and chromatic (yellow); the attention mark display 004SG327A is small in size and chromatic (red); and the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Furthermore, the "Warning Marks 004SG326A and 004SG326B" are marks that assist in making headlines that draw the player's attention more prominent, while the "Attention Marks 004SG327A and 004SG327B" are marks that assist illustrations that indicate areas that players should focus on. Unlike text, these are displayed as single marks, so it is preferable that they be chromatic in color to stand out more than the achromatic headline text.

The number of reserved symbols and the small symbols are specified as "small" in size and achromatic (black) in color.

As shown in Figures 90(A) and 91, comparing the display of the company name display 004SG302 with the number of reserved items and small patterns in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B have larger font sizes, use more display colors, and have higher saturation and brightness in their color tones compared to the number of reserved items and small patterns. Therefore, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more prominently than the number of reserved items and small patterns.

In this embodiment, the reserved memory count and small design elements are exemplified as being achromatic (black). However, they may also be chromatic. Even in such cases, the corporate slogan display 004SG302A and the corporate logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more prominently than the reserved memory count and small design elements if they satisfy at least one of the following conditions: larger font size, more display colors used, or higher saturation and brightness.

Next, as shown in Figures 90(B), (C) and 91, comparing the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) with the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 which forms the background of the heading display 004SG313 is chromatic (dark blue), while the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Thus, by using different background colors for the warning text in Warning Part 1 and Warning Part 2, the system can increase attention when switching from Warning Part 1 to Warning Part 2, which are warnings about different issues such as preventing excessive engrossment and preventing physical accidents. As a result, it enables more effective customer waiting control.

Next, comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name), the drowsiness prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1), and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), we see that the background display 004SG301 for the company name in the company name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the warning background display 004SG311 in the drowsiness prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG321 in the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

Thus, by using different background colors for the text display in the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warning 1, warning 2), the visual distinction between the company name and the warnings increases attention when the display switches, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration where the background colors of the text displays for the company name background display 004SG301, the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 are all different, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is sufficient that the background color of at least one of the text displays among the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 differs from the background color of the text display for the company name background display 004SG301.

(Comparison of lighting patterns in each scene)
Next, based on Figure 85(B), and referring to Figures 88 and 89, we compare the illumination patterns of the lamps in each scene during the demo movie display.

<Synchronization with Text Animation Display> In Scene 1 (Company Name), Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), and Scene 4 (Warning 1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in conjunction with the text animation display (fade-in display). However, in Scene 2 (Machine Introduction 1, 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in conjunction with the character animation display (not synchronized with the text animation display).

<Emphasis Level> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "high" emphasis level. In Scene 2 (Machine Introduction 1-3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "medium" emphasis level. In Scene 4 (Warning 1, 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "low" emphasis level.

"Emphasis" refers to the degree of emphasis in the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). For example, flashing (blinking), i.e., when the interval between color changes in the luminance data is short, results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than wave lighting, where the interval between color changes in the luminance data is long. A larger number of lit lamps results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a smaller number of lit lamps. A larger number of lit colors results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a smaller number of lit colors. A higher proportion of chromatic colors results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a lower proportion of chromatic colors. Rainbow lighting results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than non-rainbow lighting. Higher luminance results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than lower luminance.

Specifically, referring to Figure 176 based on Figure 85(B), the emphasis level for the first scene (company name) is "high" because a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display. The emphasis level for the second scene (model introductions 1-3) is "medium" because while there is a green flash, it is not linked to the text animation display. The emphasis level for the third scene (main model title, sub-model title) is "high" because a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display. The emphasis level for the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2) is "low" because it is not linked to the text animation display.

In other words, the intensity of the lights is higher when displaying the company name than when displaying a warning, and also higher when displaying the title than when displaying a warning. Furthermore, because the company name has more light changes linked to the animation than the model title, the intensity of the lights is higher when displaying the company name than when displaying the model title. Therefore, the order of intensity of the lights is: Company Name > Model Title (Main, Sub) > Warning.

Furthermore, since multiple panel lamps and frame lamps are provided in multiple locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emission of a first lamp (consisting of multiple lamps) and the light emission of a second lamp (consisting of multiple lamps), it is sufficient to compare the average light emission pattern of the entire first lamp with the average light emission pattern of the entire second lamp, rather than comparing the emphasis of a single first lamp with a single second lamp.

In the third scene of the <Rainbow> sequence (main title name, subtitle name), specifically in the "subtitle name" section (for example, Figures 89(P) to (V)), the panel lamps and frame lamps illuminate in a rainbow pattern. The luminance data table used at this time (the sub-table described later) is the same rainbow luminance data table (common table described later (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)) used in the aforementioned step-up effect (see Figure 83(B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 84(D)).

<Specific Light Emission> In the third scene (title name), only in the designated frames of the machine's subtitle name (for example, Figure 89 (S), (U)), the panel lamps and frame lamps will emit a white flash (specific mode). The luminance data table used at this time (the sub-table described later) is a different luminance data table for subtitle 1 and subtitle 2 than the main title luminance data table used for the machine's main title name, and it emits a white flash (specific mode) in conjunction with the text animation display.

As shown in Figure 85(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a different luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) is used from the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part), and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) as in the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) is used in the first scene (corporate name). The brightness data table for Introduction 2 (a sub-table corresponding to parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 of the model introduction) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302 shown in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), and does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), nor does it include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

As described above, while the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text, the company name information is particularly important. By using brightness data linked to the display animation, it can be emphasized in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

As shown in Figure 85(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a different luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) is used, as is the luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) as in the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, and the luminance data for subtitle 2 are used. The tables (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (main title name and subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (introduction 2-1), nor does it include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (introduction 2-2).

As described above, while there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text, we particularly want to convey the model name. By using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) (see Figure 86) is more emphasized (more emphasized) than the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts) (see Figure 86). Similarly, the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 luminance data table, and subtitle 2 luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (see Figure 86) is more emphasized (more emphasized) than the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a high level of emphasis because it uses a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display. Similarly, the third scene (main title and subtitle of the device) also has a high level of emphasis because it uses a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display. However, the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2) does not use a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display, resulting in a low level of emphasis.

As described above, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes that convey information through text. To emphasize each piece of information—such as the company name, model title, and warnings—dedicated lighting can be used for each. Specifically, by emphasizing the lighting patterns in the scenes displaying the company name and model title compared to the warning scenes, these elements can be highlighted, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) are emphasized more than the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts), and the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 brightness data table, and subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are emphasized more than the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are emphasized more than the modes in which the warning brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts) are emphasized if they are (1) modes with frequent flashing, (2) modes with many illuminated colors, (3) modes with a large number of light-emitting means used, or (4) modes with high brightness. This allows for emphasis on the corporate name and model title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to the corporate name part) is emphasized more than the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to the main title part), the sub-title 1 brightness data table, and the sub-title 2 brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to sub-title 1 and 2 parts). This allows for greater emphasis on the corporate name, making it easier for players to understand which company is associated with the gaming machine, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the Rainbow Brightness Data Table (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2) while the demo movie is being displayed. When step-up effects (see Figure 83(B)) or cut-in effects (see Figure 84(D)) are executed, the Rainbow Brightness Data Table (grandchild tables corresponding to the step-up and cut-in effects) is used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). The Rainbow Brightness Data Table used during the demo movie display (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2) and the Rainbow Brightness Data Table used when step-up effects (see Figure 83(B)) or cut-in effects (see Figure 84(D)) are executed (grandchild tables corresponding to the step-up and cut-in effects) are common Brightness Data Tables (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the illumination pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more visually appealing. Furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for setting the illumination pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used for specific effects performed during gameplay (e.g., step-up effects and cut-in effects), the capacity is not increased, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) following the end of gameplay in the low base state (normal state) (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2), the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) following the end of gameplay in the high base state (special state) (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2), and the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used when step-up effects (see Figure 83(B)) (specific effects) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and cut-in effects (see Figure 84(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are all common luminance data tables (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the illumination pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more spectacular. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the illumination pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects that can be executed in normal conditions and special effects that can be executed in special conditions, the capacity is not increased, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the step-up animation (see Figure 83(B)) (specific animation) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and the cut-in animation (see Figure 84(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are animations that definitively notify that the game is being controlled to a jackpot state. Since the brightness data table (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)) used for animations that definitively indicate control to a jackpot state is also used for demonstration displays, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved as a result.

Furthermore, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) are luminance data tables that use multiple luminance data to illuminate the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in a manner that is linked to the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520B and 004SG520C.

In this way, the main title name and subtitle name are displayed in that order. Since the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized by illuminating the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in conjunction with the subtitle name display animation, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 86, the multiple luminance data sets constituting the company name luminance data table (a sub-table corresponding to the company name part) are luminance data configured to illuminate the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means). The multiple luminance data sets constituting the introduction luminance data table (a sub-table corresponding to the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, and 3-2 parts) are luminance data configured to illuminate the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp, but not the main lamp 9a.

As described above, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display. In the scene displaying the company name, both the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamps 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated. In the scene introducing the model, the panel lamp and side lamps 9b (first light-emitting means) illuminate, but the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) does not. This relatively emphasizes the first scene in which the company name is displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, an example is shown where the first light-emitting means consists of the panel lamp and side lamp 9b, and the second light-emitting means consists of the main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. In the second scene, at least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light-emitting means that does not emit light, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light-emitting means.

Furthermore, as a variation, the CPU 120 for performance control may control the first light-emitting means (e.g., panel lamp) in the second scene's machine introduction part using a brightness data table for introduction 1 (a grandchild table corresponding to machine introduction 1 part), control the first light-emitting means (e.g., panel lamp) in the second machine introduction part using a brightness data table for introduction 2 (a grandchild table corresponding to machine introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3), and control the second light-emitting means (e.g., frame lamp) in both machine introduction 1 and machine introduction 2 using a single brightness data table (a grandchild table).

As described above, while there are multiple scenes in the demo movie where information is conveyed through text display, in the scenes where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are set to emit light in a dedicated emission mode. In the parts 1 and 2 of the product introduction, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated emission mode, while the second light-emitting means emits light in a common emission mode. This allows the scenes where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control may, in the first part of the second scene's machine introduction, control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using a single brightness data table for machine introduction 1 (a grandchild table corresponding to the first part of machine introduction), which is different from the corporate brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part), the machine main title brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the machine subtitle brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first and second subtitle parts), the warning 1 brightness data table, and the warning 2 brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first and second warning parts). In the second part of the second scene's machine introduction 2, the same single brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first part of machine introduction) may be used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

As described above, there are multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. Since information such as company names, model titles, and warnings need to be emphasized, using dedicated illumination for each allows for greater emphasis compared to other text displays, ultimately enabling more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the execution duration of the machine introduction scene (including parts 1 and 2) is 30 seconds longer than the execution duration of the company name display scene (10 seconds). Similarly, the execution duration of the machine introduction scene (including parts 1 and 2) is 30 seconds longer than the execution duration of the warning display scene (5 seconds). The company name and warning text may appear at times other than during the demo movie. By extending the emphasis of machine introduction scenes and title display scenes, which are only shown during the demo movie, a more effective customer waiting control system can be achieved.

Furthermore, it is possible to display company names and warning text even when the demo movie is not playing. For example, the company name and warning text may be displayed during the ending period after the jackpot round ends, or the same text displayed during the demo movie may be displayed. In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demo movie to avoid disrupting the tempo of the jackpot and high base state.

(Lighting patterns of lamps corresponding to the game state)
Next, the lamp illumination patterns corresponding to the game state will be explained based on Figures 92 and 93. Figure 92 is a diagram showing the lamp illumination patterns corresponding to the game state. Figure 93 shows (A) a diagram indicating the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in Figure 92, the panel lamps and frame lamps on the pachinko game machine 1 are configured to illuminate in different ways depending on the state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is issued due to a cold start, when it is controlled to a low base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie is displayed, and when an error notification (described later) is issued.

Specifically, during the initialization notification period, the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e flash red.

In the low base state, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used, and the panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamps 9b light up in a wave pattern with "blue" as the primary color, while the button lamp 9e lights up in "white".

In the low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state), the brightness data table for the time-saving background (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with "green" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". Furthermore, in the high-probability, high-base state (probability variation state), the brightness data table for the probability variation background (lamp data table: background probability variation) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with "purple" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". In the following, these brightness data tables for the time-saving background and the brightness data table for the probability variation background may be collectively referred to as the high-base background brightness data table (or high-B background brightness data table).

During the demonstration (demo movie display) period, a customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamps 9b change their illumination patterns with "white" as the primary color, while the button lamp 9e lights up in "white".

During the error notification period, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used. The panel lamps and side lamps 9b illuminate in a color corresponding to the state (low base state, high base state, demo effect), while the main lamp 9a flashes red and the button lamp 9e illuminates white.

Furthermore, the "main color" refers to the color that forms the base of the overall color scheme for each period. For example, it may be the color with the highest occupancy rate in terms of illumination time and illumination area (number of lamps) during each period. Other colors may also be emitted. Additionally, it may include multiple colors with different luminance, lightness, and saturation within a given hue. If the main color is "blue," then any similar shades of "blue" are acceptable.

For example, let's explain analogous colors based on Figure 179. Colors have three attributes: hue, lightness (luminance, brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Analogous colors" include: 1. Combinations of adjacent colors (colors with the same hue group, meaning they share the same tone, lightness, and saturation); 2. Combinations of colors with the same hue but different tones; and 3. Combinations of colors that differ only in lightness or saturation.

To explain the example of "1. Combinations of colors that are adjacent in hue and have the same tone (luminance and saturation)" based on Figures 179 (A) and (B), if we arrange the three primary colors of light—red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F]—at 120-degree intervals in a color wheel of a predetermined number of colors (24 in this case), then each set of three colors will be non-analogous. Colors with a hue difference within a range of 30 to 60 degrees on this color wheel are considered "analogous," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the color wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards yellow (Y) and a 30-degree range towards cyan (C) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to red (R). If green (G) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards magenta (M) and a 30-degree range towards yellow (Y) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to green (G). If blue (B) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards cyan (C) and a 30-degree range towards magenta (M) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors with a hue difference within a 30-60 degree range on the color wheel can be considered "analogous colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that the same color family includes combinations of colors that fall under the categories of warm colors (such as red and yellow), cool colors (such as blue and purple), and neutral colors (such as green and purple), which are intermediate between warm and cool colors.

As shown in Figure 93(A), the board lamps include the attacker lamp 9c built into the special variable prize ball device 7 located in the lower right of the game board 2, the movable lamp 9d built into the movable body 32 located at the top of the image display device 5, and the decorative lamp 9f built into the decorative body located on the left side of the image display device 5. Note that other lamps (for example, lamps built into prize ball devices) may also be included as long as they are provided on the game board 2.

Furthermore, the frame lamps include the main lamp 9a located at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, the side lamps 9b located on the left and right sides, and the button lamps 9e located on the push button 31B. Note that other lamps located on the gaming machine frame 3 (for example, lamps built into the ball-shooting handle 30, speakers 8L, and 8R) may also be included.

Furthermore, the attacker lamp 9c of the control panel is composed of multiple LEDs, the movable lamp 9d is composed of multiple LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is composed of multiple LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of multiple LEDs, the side lamp 9b is composed of multiple LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of multiple LEDs.

Furthermore, Figure 93(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in Figure 93(A). For convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in Figure 93(B) may be used in subsequent explanations.

(Customer waiting demo performance begins, variation stopped version)
Next, the flow from when the variable display stops until the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 94 to 99 and Figure 180. Figure 94 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance is initiated after the variable display of the first special symbol ends in a low base state (A1) to (A8). Figure 95 shows the main parts of Figure 94 (A4) to (A5). Figure 96 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. Figure 97 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. Figure 98 shows an example of operation of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state (B1) to (B8). Figure 99 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. Figure 100 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. Figure 101 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance starts after the pachinko game machine is started with a cold start (power on with initialization). Figure 102 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a cold start until the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 103 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start (power on without initialization) in a low base state and the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 104 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a low base state until the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 105 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state and the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 106 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state until the customer waiting demo performance begins.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of how the customer waiting demo sequence works when the game state is in a low base state, based on Figures 94 to 97.

As shown in Figures 94 and 96, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, if the execution of a pre-announcement effect or a reach effect has been decided (see Figure 94(A1)), these effects will be executed (though not specifically shown in the illustrations). During the variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden.

Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin with a blue wave illumination based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate in white based on the default brightness data table. Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R output the normal background BGM. When a pre-announcement or reach animation is performed, a brightness data table for the pre-announcement or reach animation (a lamp data table corresponding to the pre-announcement or reach animation) is set, and the illumination control and BGM output are adjusted according to the animation.

Next, when the variable display ends and a losing combination of symbols (for example, "326") is displayed (see Figure 94 (A2)), the CPU 103 sends a demo waiting command, and the CPU 120 for performance control starts the demo movie start waiting timer (120 seconds), marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). The BGM output is stopped, but it may be configured to fade out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A3)). Once it moves to the right and animates to its designated position, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A4)).

After another 90 seconds have elapsed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, the customer waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 94 (A5) to (A8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In order to start displaying the demo movie, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the screen to display the demo movie for the demo performance. This allows the CPU to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

For details, as shown in Figure 95 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen shows a combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) as the background of the first background display 004SG081. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before the first background display 004SG081 switches to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, and the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) switches to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from blue wave lighting to a white-based illumination pattern (see Figures 95 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out (see Figure 95 (A42)), the demo movie display begins (see Figure 95 (A5)).

In this manner, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the low base state (the variable display shows a stopped display), and displays the demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period. Then, before switching the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, the CPU switches the brightness data table from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Therefore, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the demo movie display, the design allows users to focus on the changes rather than starting everything at once, making them aware of the start of the demo movie display, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 for the demo performance is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the display of the demo movie. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command BF01, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the display of the demo movie. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) to elapse before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in Figure 96, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo performance start condition S1 was met, the fade-out display (switching display) of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns is started, and after the display screen whites out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, regarding the display content, it starts switching control to switch from the normal background display to a demo movie display that includes a fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 94 (A5)) for the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the display switching period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the customer-waiting demo of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, by switching the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before the fade-out display described above occurs, it is possible to prevent causing discomfort to the player (see Figures 95 (A31), (A32), and 96).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be varied in various ways. Furthermore, while a fade display was used as the switching display, other scene change displays may be used, or the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern may be maintained without using a fade display or similar.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 96, if 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo termination condition being met, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance termination condition E1 has been met. Then, the display screen shows the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols), along with the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 94 (A4)). Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and light emission control is performed based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). The button lamps 9e are controlled based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Thus, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance termination condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated for subsequent attempts until any of the demo performance termination conditions E2 to E4 are fulfilled. Furthermore, from the second attempt onward, based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns are displayed. Along with the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 180).

Furthermore, the animation display (frame-in display) for the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onward is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) for the first time (see Figure 94 (A3)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in Figure 95, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the low base state (variable display shows stopped). During the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period, it displays a demo movie. During the first customer waiting period, it controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). During the second customer waiting period, it controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Meanwhile, during both the first and second customer waiting periods, it controls the illumination of button lamps 9e using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), which is different from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo).

Thus, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the state of the button lamp 9e constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

For details, as described above, when using the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated and flashed in conjunction with the display mode of the demo movie. For example, if button lamp 9e lights up when an operation prompt display encouraging the operation of push button 31B is shown during a performance introduction scene, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand and perform unnecessary operations. Therefore, the button lamp 9e is kept in a fixed mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 97, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other reason in a low base state, the process of the demo movie display starting after the variable display ends is the same as when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, as shown in Figure 96. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<High base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo when the game state is in a high base state, based on Figures 98 to 99.

As shown in Figures 98 and 99, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in the high base state, if the execution of a pre-announcement effect or a reach effect has been decided (see Figure 98(B1)), these effects will be executed (though not specifically shown in the illustrations). During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden.

Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background high-broadcast (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) for probability variation (or time-saving), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). Also, the background music for high-B backgrounds is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a pre-announcement or reach animation is performed, a brightness data table for the pre-announcement or reach animation (a lamp data table corresponding to the pre-announcement or reach animation) is set, and the lighting control and background music output are performed in a manner appropriate to the animation.

Next, when the variable display ends and a losing combination of symbols (for example, "326") is displayed (see Figure 98 (B2)), the CPU 103 sends a demo waiting command, and the CPU 120 for performance control starts the demo movie start waiting timer (120 seconds), marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). The BGM output is stopped, but it may be configured to fade out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 98 (B3)). Once it moves to the right and animates to its designated position, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 98 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have elapsed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 98 (B5) to (B8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

In order to start displaying the demo movie, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the screen to display the demo movie for the demo performance. This allows the CPU to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

For details, during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen shows a combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) as the background of the third background display 004SG083. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a wave pattern of purple (or green) based on the high-B background brightness data table for probability variation (or time reduction) (lamp data table: background time reduction, or lamp data table: background probability variation).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before the display switches from the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) switches to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from purple or green wave lighting to a white-based illumination pattern (see Figures 95 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out, the demo movie display begins (see Figure 98 (B5)).

In this manner, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the high base state (the variable display shows a stopped display), and displays the demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period. Then, before switching the display screen from the high-base background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Therefore, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the demo movie display, the design allows users to focus on the changes rather than starting everything at once, making them aware of the start of the demo movie display, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 for the demo performance is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the display of the demo movie. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command BF01, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the display of the demo movie. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) to elapse before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the display of the demo movie for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in Figure 98, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance was met, the CPU 120 for performance control starts the fade-out display (switching display) of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and starts displaying the company name display 004SG302 after the display screen has whited out. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to switch the display content from the high-base background display to a demo movie display that includes a fade-out display (switching display) of the high-base background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 98 (B5)) for the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the display switching period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the customer-waiting demo of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, by switching the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before the fade-out display described above occurs, it is possible to prevent causing discomfort to the player (see Figures 95 (A31), (A32), and 99).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is set to approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be varied in various ways. Furthermore, while a fade display was used as the switching display, other scene change displays may be used, or the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern may be maintained without using a fade display or similar.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 99, if 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo termination condition being met, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance termination condition E1 has been met. Then, the display screen shows the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 94 (A4)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the illumination control is performed based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), while the button lamps 9e are illuminated based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

Thus, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance termination condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated for subsequent attempts until any of the demo performance termination conditions E2 to E4 are fulfilled. Furthermore, from the second attempt onward, based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are displayed. Along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 180).

Furthermore, the animation display (frame-in display) for the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onward is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) for the first time (see Figure 98 (B3)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. It then starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display shows a stopped display), displays a demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the second customer waiting period. During the waiting period, the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is controlled using a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). Meanwhile, during the first and second customer waiting periods, the illumination of button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination), which is different from the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration).

Thus, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the state of the button lamp 9e constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, by maintaining a consistent configuration for the button lamp 9e in both the low-base and high-base states, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in either state, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the brightness data table for the background of the high probability B (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the brightness data table for the company corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) during the first scene of the second customer waiting period (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.), the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the second scene (machine introductions 1, 2-1 The control panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a sub-table corresponding to parts 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2. In the first scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit), which is different from the corporate brightness data table (sub-table corresponding to the corporate name part) and the brightness data tables for introductions 1-3 (sub-tables corresponding to parts 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2). In the second scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Thus, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by maintaining a consistent mode, this misunderstanding can be prevented, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) is different from the brightness data table used when the promotional animation (lamp data table: button white blinking, lamp data table: button red blinking) is executed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. The brightness data constituting the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) exhibits less brightness variation than the brightness data constituting the promotional animation brightness data table (lamp data table: button white blinking, lamp data table: button red blinking).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the push button 31B is being prompted to be pressed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the push button 31B is being prompted to be pressed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the default brightness data table may be configured to consist of brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing they are being prompted to press the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, although the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided on the gaming machine frame 3, it is managed separately from the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3. This design prevents players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, allows for optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 96, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 94(A2)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 99, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol has finished, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 98 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Thus, in both low-base and high-base states, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, since the player may have left their seat after the demo movie display ends, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display encourages a more suitable playing environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other reason in a high base state, the process of the demo movie display starting after the variable display ends is the same as when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, as shown in Figure 99. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 97, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 94(A2)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 98 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, even after the variable display of the first special symbol in both the low-base and high-base states has ended, and even after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demo movie display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

<Cold Start>
Next, an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance starts after the pachinko game machine 1 has been started up with a cold start (power-on with initialization) will be explained based on Figures 101 to 102.

As shown in Figures 101(C1) and 102, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and at the timing when the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on specification command and a first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initialization display 004SG610 starts in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (see Figure 101(C2)), and initial operation control such as confirmation operation of the movable body 32 starts (not shown). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin flashing red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the initialization notification sound starts outputting from speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, the demo movie start waiting timer (60 seconds) begins, marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, 10 seconds after receiving the power-on command and the first game state background command, the initialization process is completed. The initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 101 (C3)). At this time, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). Furthermore, the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 101 (C4)), move to the right to its designated position, and animate. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 101 (C5)).

After another 30 seconds have elapsed, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S2 has been met. Based on this determination, the customer waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 101 (C6) to (C9)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the light emission pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to light up white based on the default brightness data table.

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 94-96 for the low-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot Start (Low Base State)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 103 to 104.

As shown in Figures 103 (D1) and 104, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start in a low base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation indicator 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. At the same time, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the button lamps 9e begin to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), and the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R stops. Also, the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) begins to count, and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 103 (D2)). At the same time, initial operation control, such as the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer began without the demo end condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 103 (D3)), moves to the right to the predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 103 (D4)).

After another 60 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met. Based on this determination, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden from the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 103 (D5) to (D8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 94-96 for the low-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot Start (High Base Condition)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 105 to 106.

As shown in Figures 105(E1) and 106, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up with a hot start in a high base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after startup, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. Simultaneously, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background specification commands from CPU 103, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R stops. At the same time, the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) begins, marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background specification commands from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) begins (see Figure 105(E2)). At the same time, initial operation control, such as the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer began without the demo end condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 105(E3)), moves to the right to the predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 105(E4)).

After another 60 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 105 (E5) to (E8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the light emission pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to light up white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 98 to 100 for the high-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 104 and 106, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and then a hot start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start to be displayed, but will instead display the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figures 103 (D2) and 105 (E2)), and will then display a demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 102, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a cold start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 will display the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 101(C3)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then display the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will be displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while simultaneously displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Thus, before a gaming parlor opens, there are two possible startup scenarios: a hot start (power on without initialization) and a cold start (power on with initialization). In either startup scenario, parlor staff can verify the display by checking the background display, demo movie display, and guidance display after power-on, thus improving the efficiency of the verification process. Furthermore, when the parlor opens and welcomes players, if a background display is shown, it will be the background display that also shows the guidance display. This allows for clear guidance regarding performance adjustments from the moment players start playing, providing them with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or cold start, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, followed by the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 before the demo movie display begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the demo movie display may begin after the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, without the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 102 and 104, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 while it is in a low base state, and then the power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 will display the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figures 101(C3) and 103(D2)), and then display the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will be displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while simultaneously displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 105, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 while it is in a high base state, and then the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) starts displaying, and will instead display the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 105 (D2)), and then will display a demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Thus, before a gaming parlor opens, there are two possible startup states: a low base state and a high base state. To allow players to confirm which state the parlor is in, the system avoids displaying guidance messages in the background to avoid interference. If the background reappears afterward, it's highly likely the state has already been confirmed. Therefore, by displaying guidance messages from the moment the background display begins, when the parlor opens and welcomes players, the background display will show the guidance message. This allows for clear guidance regarding adjustments to the game's presentation from the start of play, providing players with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, after the variable display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. After a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed with a specific animation (fade-in display), thereby displaying the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed superimposed on the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). This is achieved by displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 using the same animation (frame-in display) as the first menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402.

In this way, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, by prompting performance adjustments immediately after the demo movie display ends and the display switches from the demo movie to the background, it is possible to encourage players to play in a suitable gaming environment. Additionally, by using the same animation as when the guidance message is displayed immediately after the demo movie display switches to the background, it is possible to appeal to players that the guidance message has been displayed without incurring additional costs, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is used as an example for the animation display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction of movement, movement speed, display position, etc., are not limited to those described above. Furthermore, other forms of animation display, such as fade-in display, moving display, or zoom display, may also be used.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 96, 99, 104, 106, and 180, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via hot start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via hot start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5).

Thus, after the variable display ends, immediately displaying the demo movie could be inconvenient because the player might not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer duration of 120 seconds is set for TC1 and TC2. However, after a hot start, since a store employee, not a player, is present, a shorter duration of 90 seconds is set for TC4 and TC5. This allows the employee to quickly check the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 96, 99, 102, and 180, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since the power-on specification command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 starting up in a cold start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since the power-on specification command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 starting up in a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1 and tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

Thus, if the demo movie display is shown immediately after the variable display ends, it may be inconvenient as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time, TC1 and TC2 = 120 seconds, is set. After a cold start (power-on with initialization), since this is the initial start method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor, a shorter time, TC3 = 60 seconds, is set so that the demo movie display is shown immediately. This allows the parlor staff to quickly check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 102, 104, 106, and 180, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a hot start in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a hot start in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a cold start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 90 seconds (the third specified period tc4, tc5) is a longer period than 60 seconds (the second specified period tc3).

Thus, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial starting method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By ensuring that the demo movie is displayed immediately, parlor staff can quickly review the demo movie and become more familiar with the installed machine, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 96, 99, and 102, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state, displays the demo movie again after 30 seconds (a predetermined period) have elapsed since the demo movie display ended, displays the demo movie again after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state, displays the demo movie again after 30 seconds (a predetermined period) has elapsed since the demo movie display ended, and so on, in the low base state of the pachinko game machine Based on the fact that unit 1 started up in a cold start, a power-on command was received, and after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) elapsed, a demo movie was displayed. After the demo movie display ended, 30 seconds (a predetermined period) elapsed, and the demo movie was displayed again. Based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up in a cold start in a high base state, a power-on command was received, and after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) elapsed, a demo movie was displayed. After the demo movie display ended, 30 seconds (a predetermined period) elapsed, and the demo movie was displayed again. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

Thus, if the demo movie is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, it may be inconvenient as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer period of 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is set. Since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial start method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor, a shorter period of tc3 = 60 seconds is set so that the demo movie is displayed immediately. This allows the parlor staff to quickly check the demo movie and become more familiar with the installed machine. Furthermore, by ensuring that the demo movie is displayed once in all situations—after the variable display ends in a low base state, after the variation ends in a high base state, and after a cold start—and then the period until the demo movie is displayed again is consistent, the demo movie can be shown stably, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 104 and 106, after starting up via hot start, a startup preparation indicator 004SG600 is displayed to indicate that startup is in progress (see Figures 103(D1) and 105(E1)). At the timing associated with displaying the startup preparation indicator, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). At the timing associated with displaying the startup preparation indicator 004SG600, the button lamps 9e are controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, by using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to illuminate the system even before the background display is shown, it is possible to confirm that the panel lamps and frame lamps are functioning correctly at the startup stage. Subsequently, the system can seamlessly transition to the illumination pattern for customer waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Time elapsed since the end of the demo performance while waiting for customers)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends due to the passage of time will be explained based on Figures 107 to 109. Figure 107 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time in a low base state (A) to (E). Figure 108 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time in a low base state. Figure 109 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of what happens when the customer waiting demo sequence ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed while the game is in a low-base state, based on Figures 107 and 108.

As shown in Figures 107 and 108, in the low-base state, if the first demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when the end condition E1 is met (i.e., 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display), the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6th hour) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is assumed to be met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display are met.

For details, as shown in Figure 107(A), when the second part of the warning message in the fourth and final scene of the demo movie display is shown, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based emission pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, when the termination condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the system switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see Figure 107(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met, a fade-out display (switching display) begins, in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the warning part 2 of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends in with the black warning background display 004SG321 (see Figure 107(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 107(D)), moves to the right to a predetermined position and is displayed as an animation, at which point the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 107(E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background display, including the fade-out display (switching display). However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background begins after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 107(C) and 108).

In detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the CPU 120 for performance control. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the CPU 120 for performance control starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the demo (lamp data table: demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the normal background display, a gradual design is employed. This prevents a negative impression after the demo display ends, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period following the end of the variable display in the low base state, and using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) during the first customer waiting period following the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state. Before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, it switches control from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, followed by the start of the background display. This step-by-step design prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo movie display, and furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display starts based on the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display switched from the background to the demo movie display. Conversely, when the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from the demo movie to the background display.

<High base condition>
First, we will explain an example of what happens when the customer waiting demo sequence ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed while the game is in a high-base state, based on Figures 107 and 109.

As shown in Figures 107 and 109, in a high base state, if the first demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when the end condition E1 is met (i.e., 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display), the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6 hours) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is considered met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display are met.

For details, as shown in Figure 107(A), when the second part of the warning message in the fourth and final scene of the demo movie display is shown, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based emission pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, when the termination condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see Figure 107(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met, a fade-out display (switching display) begins in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the warning part 2 of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends in with the black warning background display 004SG321 (see Figure 107(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 107(D)), moves to the right to a predetermined position and is displayed as an animation, and then the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 107(E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, regarding the display content, it starts switching control to switch from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), which includes a fade-out display (switching display), and the background display of decorative symbols. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the high-B music background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 107(C) and 109).

In detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123, after transmitting the extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switched. In particular, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns begins after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) for the high-B music background begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the high-B background display, a gradual design is employed. This prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using a brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended following the end of the variable display in the high base state, and controls them using a brightness data table for high B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period has ended following the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state, and then switches from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Before switching the display, the system switches and controls from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Similarly, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the system switches and controls from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, followed by the start of the background display. This step-by-step design prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo movie display, and furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display starts based on the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display switched from the background to the demo movie display. Conversely, when the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from the demo movie to the background.

(End of demo performance while waiting for customers. Start of prize-winning version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a starting win will be explained based on Figures 110 to 115. Figure 110 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with a starting win in a low base state (A) to (E). Figure 111 shows details of the display modes in Figure 110 (A) to (G). Figure 112 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first starting win in a low base state. Figure 113 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second starting win in a low base state. Figure 114 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second starting win in a high base state. Figure 115 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first starting win in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of how the game works when the game state is low-base and the customer waiting demo sequence ends with the first winning combination, based on Figures 110 to 112.

As shown in Figures 110 to 112, in a low base state, if the demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of the first start prize (start of variable display of the first special symbol) that occurred during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 110(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie display is being shown, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 110(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols begins, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins (see Figures 110(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E2 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (variable display) display and the variable display of decorative symbols. However, the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met (see Figures 110(C) and 112).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 111(A), when the first start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. Meanwhile, the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 111(B)).

Next, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols begins. Simultaneously, the first reserved display 004SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Following this, a shift display begins, moving the first reserved display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F (see Figures 111(C) and (D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 111(C) to 111(E), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in these areas until the first hold display 004SG101, displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F—that is, until the hold display shift is complete. During this time, the scrolling display will not begin, and each character will perform a variation start action. A variation start action includes actions such as the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052 moving its face or body or changing its expression on the base display unit 004SG054, which are different from scrolling displays.

Then, once the hold display shift display is complete, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling in the order of left, right, and center (see Figure 109(F)). Once scrolling begins, the scrolling speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low, medium, and high, and a fade-out display begins. The image transparency (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching approximately 90% at high speed (see Figures 109(G) and 112). Note that in the low base state (first performance mode), regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the display will be as shown in Figure 111.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination mode of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) has switched. Visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the demo (lamp data table: demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, extending over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other event in a low base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, as shown in Figure 112. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<High base condition>
First, we will explain an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a second start win while the game state is in a high base state, based on Figure 114, with reference to Figures 110 and 181.

As shown in Figure 114, in a high base state, if the demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of a second start-up win (start of variable display of the second special symbol) during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 110(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the second scene introduction part 1 of the demo movie is displayed, if a second start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 110(B). In Figure 110(B), blue waves are lit). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols begins, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins (see Figures 110(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E2 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols. However, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 110(C)).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns, and after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in Figure 181(A), when the second start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. Meanwhile, the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 181(B)).

Next, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols begins. Simultaneously, the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Following this, a shift display begins, moving the second reserved display 004SG102 to the active display area 5F (see Figure 181(C)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 181(C) to 181(D), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in these areas until the second hold display 004SG102, displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F—that is, until the hold display shift is complete. However, in the high base state, the character variation start action is not executed (see Figure 82(B)).

Then, once the shift display of the hold display is complete, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling simultaneously on the left, right, and center (see Figure 181(E)). Once scrolling begins, the scrolling speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low, medium, and high speed, and a fade-out display begins. The transparency of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching approximately 90% at high speed (see Figures 181(F) and (G)).

Furthermore, in the high base state (second and third performance modes), the appearance will be as shown in Figure 181 regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated.

Therefore, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the high-B background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the system switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) by switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state when the first start condition is met while the demo movie display is shown, from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). Similarly, when the demo movie display is shown in the high base state and the second start condition is met, the CPU 120 controls the display from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first in the high base state, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) allows for a quick indication that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in both the low-base and high-base states, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly signal that the first or second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are positioned around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 115, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other event in a high base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, as shown in Figure 114. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) by switching from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol when a first start win occurs while the demo movie display is being shown. Similarly, when a second start win occurs while the demo movie display is being shown, the CPU 120 switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Thus, regardless of which type of starting win occurs, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) allows for quick notification that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, displays a scrolling display of decorative symbols so that the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) that is higher than the first value. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, the CPU switches the display from the demo movie to the variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative patterns increases, it is possible to signal that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a scrolling display of decorative symbols so that the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%), which is higher than the first value, when a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed in a low base state, the display switches from the demo movie to a variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed in a high base state, the display switches from the demo movie to a variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

Thus, in both low-base and high-base states, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative symbols increases, it is possible to signal that a first or second win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, even if the variable display of the small symbols begins upon the occurrence of the first or second starting win, the transparency of the decorative symbols will not change while the decorative symbols are performing their variation start action. Therefore, the display will switch from the demo movie to the background display for the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from its initial value.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when a first starting win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, switches the display from the demo movie to a variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. Similarly, when a second starting win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, switches the display from the demo movie to a variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

Thus, regardless of whether a first or second start-up win occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative symbols increases, it is possible to signal that a start-up win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo performance - steering wheel operation version)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends with steering wheel operation will be explained based on Figures 116 to 117. Figure 116 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with steering wheel operation in a low base state (A) to (C). Figure 117 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with steering wheel operation in a low base state.

<Low base condition>
The following explains an example of how the waiting demo sequence ends with a handle operation when the game state is in a low base state, based on Figures 116 to 117. Note that while the following explanation describes the example of how the waiting demo sequence ends with a handle operation when the game state is low base, the example of how the waiting demo sequence ends with a handle operation when the game state is high base is almost identical, with only the background display and lamp data changing to those for high base states, so the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in Figures 116 and 117, in the low base state, if the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E3 is met, that is, when the display is terminated based on the handle operation, the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 116(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie is displayed, if steering wheel operation is detected and termination condition E3 is met, the system switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 116(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E3 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to a predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 116(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E3 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (symbol stop) display. However, the normal background display and decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E3 was met (see Figures 116(C) and 117).

In detail, when the termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, this means that the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative patterns, and guidance displays.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects operation of the ball-hitting handle 30 while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the ball-hitting handle 30 has been operated and that the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E3 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demo performance - Menu operation version)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends with menu operation will be explained based on Figures 118 to 119. Figure 118 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a low base state (A) to (C). Figure 119 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a low base state. Figure 120 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
An example of how the game operates when the customer waiting demo sequence ends by opening the menu display while the game is in a low base state will be explained based on Figures 118 to 120.

As shown in Figures 118 to 119, in the low base state, when the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E4 is met, that is, when the menu display 004SG410 is opened (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is defined as the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may also be used.

For details, as shown in Figure 118(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie is displayed, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met, the system switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 118(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 118(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. However, the normal background display and menu display 004SG410 start only after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was met (see Figures 118(C) and 119).

In detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative symbols, and menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 via push button 31B while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guidance display 004SG401.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the demo movie display has ended due to the operation of push button 31B to display the menu guidance display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base condition>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo sequence ends by opening the menu display while the game is in a high base state will be explained based on Figures 118 and 120.

As shown in Figures 118 and 120, in the high base state, when the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E4 is met, that is, when the menu display 004SG410 is opened (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (shown as the first background display 004SG081 in Figure 118) and decorative patterns begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is defined as the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may also be used.

For details, as shown in Figure 118(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is shown, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern (they are blue in Figure 118(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins. Simultaneously, the volume/brightness indicator 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 118(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). However, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was met (see Figures 118(C) and 120).

In more detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123, after transmitting the extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the high-B background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 via the push button 31B while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the demo movie display has ended due to the operation of push button 31B to display the menu guidance display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example was given in which a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) was applied as the brightness data table for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) for the menu. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a brightness data table with a different light emission pattern from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) may be set as the brightness data table for the menu.

(End of customer waiting demo when the interruption condition is met)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying a demo movie, if an interrupt condition is met, that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start win), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation) are met, or 1 (time elapsed) is met, it will switch from the demo movie display to the normal background display or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like which would normally be displayed as a switching display.

Thus, by using a transition display to prevent the demo movie display from appearing abruptly when it ends due to the passage of time, and by using a transition display to make the demo movie display appear abrupt when it ends due to an interruption condition, the contrast between these events makes it particularly clear that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying a demo movie in a low base state, if an interrupt condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start winning), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—it will switch from the demo movie display to the normal background display without displaying a fade-out or other transitional display. Similarly, when the demo movie is displaying in a high base state, if an interrupt condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start winning), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—it will switch from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out or other transitional display.

Thus, by using a transition display to prevent the demo movie display from appearing abruptly when it ends due to the passage of time, and by using a transition display to make the demo movie display appear abrupt when it ends due to an interruption condition, the contrast between these events makes it particularly clear that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the demo movie display is shown, if an interruption condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start win), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—the fade-out display that would normally be displayed as a switching display is not shown. Instead, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) from the demo movie display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When any of termination conditions E2 to E4 are met while the demo movie display is shown, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without showing a switching display.

(Customer waiting demo performance ends - Error occurred version)
Next, we will explain the case where an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance, based on Figures 121 to 124. Figure 121 shows (A) a timing chart illustrating an example of normal operation of the payout device upon winning a prize, and (B) a timing chart illustrating an example of erroneous operation of the payout device upon winning a prize. Figure 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation when a bulb failure error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance. Figure 123 is a diagram for explaining priority layers. Figure 124 is a diagram illustrating the flow when an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance started in a low base state. Figure 125 is a diagram illustrating the flow when an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance started in a high base state.

First, let's explain one of the errors: the ball failure error. The ball failure error occurs when the payout control unit operates the payout device 004SG031, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 fails to detect a game ball.

In detail, as shown in Figure 121(A), when the conditions for dispensing prize balls are met, such as when a prize is won, the dispensing device 004SG031 performs a dispensing operation (for example, the rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5 balls), and the game balls are dispensed into the dispensing passage. If all 5 game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the dispensing operation has started, the CPU 103 considers the dispensing to have been successful and terminates the dispensing process. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see Figure 122(B)), consisting of a mark and the text "Ball failure error," will not be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will not flash in the error manner described later.

Next, as shown in Figure 121(B), when a payout operation (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed by the payout device 004SG031 to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) in response to a winning combination, the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls while there are undispensed balls (e.g., 3 of the 5 game balls are not detected) for a period of time equal to the first determination period tl (e.g., tl = 5 seconds). If the CPU determines that no game balls were detected during this first determination period tl, that is, that no game balls were detected while there were undispensed balls, then the payout was deemed unsuccessful. The CPU then continues a retry operation, repeatedly executing the payout operation to dispense 5 game balls and the game ball detection check within the first determination period tl until the number of undispensed game balls (e.g., 5 balls) is detected.

Furthermore, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation during this retry period—that is, if the period during which no game balls are detected while undispensed balls exist continues for the second judgment period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl)—the CPU 103 determines that there may be a problem such as insufficient supply of game balls to the dispensing device 004SG031, a malfunction of the dispensing device 004SG031, or a ball jam in the dispensing passage. It then sends an error designation command indicating a ball shortage error and continues the retry operation.

Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving an error specification command, switches the main lamp 9a to a red flashing light for error notification, while maintaining the previous illumination pattern control for the panel lamps and side lamps 9b. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error specification command, an error display 004SG700 (see Figure 122(B)) is displayed on the display screen to provide error notification.

Furthermore, after the CPU 103 sends an error specification command indicating a ball-out error, when it detects the first game ball through a retry operation, it sends an error specification command to the performance control CPU 120 indicating that the ball-out error has been cleared. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the first judgment period tl or the second judgment period tm has elapsed since the first game ball was detected through the retry operation, an error specification command indicating the clearing of the ball-out error is sent. This allows the error notification to be terminated quickly without waiting for all unpaid balls to be detected. Also, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error clearing specification command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen, and the error notification is terminated.

Furthermore, if unpaid balls remain after sending the error specification command to clear the error, a retry operation will be initiated again. If the number of unpaid balls is not detected even after the third retry operation has completed, an error specification command indicating a ball shortage error will be sent again, and the aforementioned error notification will be resumed by the performance control CPU 120.

<Low base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol, which was started in a low base state, continues even after the demo movie display has started, based on Figures 122 to 124.

As shown in Figures 122 to 124, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see Figure 122(A)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamps 9e maintain a white illumination based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). However, for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 123, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer (see Figure 122(B)).

Here, as shown in Figure 123, basically, the normal layer has a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the panel lamps and frame lamps set according to the state. On the other hand, the priority layer, which takes precedence over the normal layer, has an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) set when an error occurs as described above. Then, by using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) preferentially over the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a will blink red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in Figure 122(C), after a bulb failure error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to flashing red, a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) elapses. Then, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen.

Subsequently, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols stop being displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to its predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 122(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b switches to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), and control of the illumination pattern based on white light begins. Even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue (see Figure 122(E)). Subsequently, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 122(F)).

Subsequently, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) in the normal layer. As a result, the main lamp 9a also begins light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see Figure 122(G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) from a predetermined point in the demo movie display. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 122(G)).

Furthermore, although not illustrated in detail, the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol (initiated by an irregular win, etc.) in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display begins is similar to the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display begins, as shown in Figure 122. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay (e.g., a bulb failure error) is carried over and executed regardless of whether the background display or the demo movie is being shown, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is carried over and executed during both background display and demo movie display, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

<High base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, which was started in a high base state, continues even after the demo movie display has started, based on Figure 125 and with reference to Figure 122.

As shown in Figure 125, in the high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (see Figure 122(A)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e maintains a white illumination based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives an error specification command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). However, for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 123, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer (see Figure 122(B)).

Here, as shown in Figure 123, basically, the normal layer has a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp set according to the state. On the other hand, the priority layer, which takes precedence over the normal layer, has an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) set when an error occurs as described above. Then, by using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) preferentially over the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a will blink red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) set in the normal layer.

Next, after a bulb failure error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to flashing red, a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) elapses. Then, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen (see Figure 122(C)).

Subsequently, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols stop being displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to its predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 122(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) switches to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission pattern based on white begins. Even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue (see Figure 122(E)). Subsequently, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 122(F)).

Subsequently, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) in the normal layer. As a result, the main lamp 9a also begins light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see Figure 122(G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) from a predetermined point in the demo movie display. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 122(G)).

Furthermore, although not illustrated in detail, the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol (initiated by an irregular win, etc.) in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display begins is similar to the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol (initiated in a high base state) and continues after the demo movie display begins, as shown in Figure 125. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in a high base state, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for bulb failure errors that occur during variable display, regardless of whether the display is low-base or high-base, is carried over and executed during background display and demo movie display, stable bulb failure error notification can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is carried over and executed during both background display and demo movie display, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error). Specifically, white is the dominant color in the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstrations, while red is the dominant color in the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to have different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, blue is the dominant color in the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background), while red is the dominant color in the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

By configuring the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) to use different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data constituting the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and also between the luminance data constituting the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: time-saving background)) and the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 92). Furthermore, the dominant colors in the luminance data that make up the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) are green (for time reduction) or purple (for probability change), while the dominant color in the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to use different main colors in the brightness data, and by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to use different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, during background display, if no bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

By configuring the luminance data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to use different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during background display, if no bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different proportions of colors (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to use different primary colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

In this embodiment, an example was given in which, when an error notification is performed, the light emission control is performed by flashing red light based on an error brightness data table set in the priority layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an error notification is performed, the light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error brightness data (grandchild data) that causes a dedicated error notification lamp to flash red.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error is announced, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the illumination for the error announcement. Since the error lamp is illuminated to alert the arcade staff, the main lamp 9a is positioned at the highest point of the frame lamps, where it is not obscured by the player and is most easily noticed by the staff. However, side lamps 9b or other lamps may also be used.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Furthermore, the system controls the side lamps 9b and panel lamps. If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the luminance data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) to use different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) to use different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the luminance data used in the luminance data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and the luminance data used in the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to produce different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are visible to the player. Specifically, the luminance data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) uses a predominantly white illumination pattern, while the luminance data table for the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) uses a red flashing pattern (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and the panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and the panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The brightness data constituting the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to result in different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Specifically, the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave illumination, the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)) displays a purple (or green) wave illumination, and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) displays a red blinking light (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability change background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the luminance data for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data for the error background (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Similarly, the luminance data for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the luminance data for the error background (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Specifically, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave illumination, the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) displays a purple (or green) wave illumination, and the error background luminance data table (lamp data table: error) displays a red flashing light (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to suggest that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). In addition, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the luminance data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to produce different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) that the player can see. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave pattern, the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)) displays a purple (or green) wave pattern, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) displays a red blinking pattern (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the main lamp 9a, the panel lamps, and the side lamps 9b, as seen by the player. Specifically, in the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) illuminate in a white-based illumination pattern, while in the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b illuminate in patterns corresponding to the state (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that an error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the lighting patterns of the main lamp 9a, the panel lamps, and side lamps 9b, as seen by the player, are configured to differ between the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced time background, lamp data table: probability variation background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced time background, lamp data table: probability variation background), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue, green, or purple wave patterns. In the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b light up in patterns corresponding to the state (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability change background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). If a bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The luminance operation patterns of the main lamp 9a and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b as seen by the player are different for the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The luminance operation patterns of the main lamp 9a and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b as seen by the player are different for the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave pattern; in the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)), they light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern; and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b light up in a pattern corresponding to the state (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to suggest that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned light emission patterns refer to light emission patterns that allow the player to perceive some kind of movement. These include, for example, flashing (alternating between on and off) and flickering (haze) (a pattern involving changes in brightness, such as a change from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400). On/off states without changes in brightness are not included in the light emission patterns. For example, in the case of flickering (haze), it is preferable to set the brightness of a specific light-emitting means to the first brightness (RGB 100) for xms of the first brightness data (or so that the combination of brightness values for the first, second, and third colors becomes the first combination), and then set the brightness of a specific light-emitting means to the second brightness (RGB A00) for yms of the second brightness data (or so that the combination of brightness values for the first, second, and third colors becomes the second combination)... Thus, assuming that the second brightness data follows the first brightness data, it is preferable that the brightness of the specific light-emitting means differs from the previous brightness data.

Furthermore, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, resulting in undispensed game balls, a ball shortage error occurs. When a ball shortage error occurs during the second customer waiting period, the CPU 120 for performance control, regardless of whether the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing unit) exceeds the number of undispensed balls or whether the number of game balls supplied does not exceed the number of undispensed balls, switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) at a timing related to the detection of the first (1st) game ball supplied by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps are switched to an illumination pattern corresponding to the demo movie display. This allows the demo movie to be displayed without any unnaturalness, standardizes the processing, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, resulting in undispensed game balls, a ball shortage error occurs. When a ball shortage error occurs during the first waiting period, the CPU 120 for performance control, regardless of whether the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing unit) exceeds the number of undispensed balls or whether the number of game balls supplied does not exceed the number of undispensed balls, switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background, lamp data table: increased background probability) at a timing related to the detection of the first (1st) game ball supplied by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the illumination patterns of the board lamps and frame lamps are switched to an illumination pattern corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, standardizes the processing, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met and the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls for the duration of the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl), the system switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps. Also, if a ball failure error occurs during the second customer waiting period, and a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a game ball, the system switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps.

Thus, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a ball, there is a possibility of a ball failure error, but there is also a possibility of ball delay, etc. Therefore, instead of immediately switching the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp, when a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the illumination mode corresponding to the demo movie display. This allows the demo movie to be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met and the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect game balls for the duration of the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl), the system switches from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps. Also, if a ball depletion error occurs during the first customer waiting period, and a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a game ball, the system switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps.

Thus, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a ball, there is a possibility of a ball failure error, but there is also a possibility of ball delay, etc. Therefore, instead of immediately switching the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp, when a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 126 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as the lamp driver) to turn on/flash/turn off one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on/flashing/turning off LEDs and other lamps performed by the performance control CPU 120 will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing to each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/flash/turn off each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/flashes/turns off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a lamp data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during a super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in the normal state (normal background shown in Figure 134), a fanfare background lamp data table used in the fanfare state where a fanfare effect is performed, a jackpot background lamp data table used during rounds in the jackpot game state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state where an ending effect is performed to announce the end of the jackpot game state, a probability variation background lamp data table used in the probability variation state (probability variation background shown in Figure 134), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (time-saving background shown in Figure 134), and a waiting customer lamp data table used in the waiting customer state (waiting customer demo shown in Figure 134).

Each of the background lamp data tables described above is used without overlap. Depending on which of the multiple game states—normal state, fanfare state, jackpot state, ending state, probability variation state, time reduction state, and waiting state—is being controlled, one of the background lamp data tables is used. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled and outputs brightness data based on that background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority order is defined for the use of each of the error lamp data tables: the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 126, the priority order for use is highest for the error lamp data table, followed by the SP reach lamp data table, and then the background lamp data table.

For example, when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state and the game progresses to a super reach performance, it prioritizes using the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance over the normal background lamp data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table and the game progresses to a super reach performance, lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the background lamp data table, while lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table has been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps where brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is set, brightness data based on the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends and the system returns to the normal state, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. Also, after the Super Reach performance ends and a jackpot is achieved, resulting in the fanfare state, brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and all lamps are controlled in accordance with the fanfare background lamp data table.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the game state being controlled using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to a super reach effect, the CPU 120 uses the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect, prioritizing it over the background lamp data table, to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement for lamp control using the background lamp data table. In other words, even while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table. However, because the brightness data included in the background lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach lamp data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data included in the background lamp data table to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach animation ends, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting brightness data from the background lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data. For the game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, the CPU continues to output brightness data from the background lamp data table to the LED driver.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state, or when it is outputting brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during a super reach performance, the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, for the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has been set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error will be used preferentially over the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, and brightness data will be output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, while the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps where brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table will not be output to the LED driver. Once the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the state during a Super Reach animation, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table will be output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance during control using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the normal background lamp data table corresponding to the normal state and the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, if an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error lamp data table corresponding to that error, with priority given to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time for lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamps 9 based on the error lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error lamp data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data. Note that for game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set, the CPU 120 continues to output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver.

[How the game effect lamp lights up]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the CPU 120 for performance control as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""partiallyoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As mentioned above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" are also referred to as "lighting states."

The term "off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "partially off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described later).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED will be "off". Also, if the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED will light up white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED with such RGB data as "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "illuminated" includes three states: constant illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 is always lit), wave illumination (where multiple lamps within the game effect lamp 9 switch from off to lit in sequence), and hazy illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 dimly illuminates while its brightness changes). Specifically, "illuminated" includes the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is one of the values from "2" to "F". The brightness data is a hexadecimal value that can be specified from "0" to "F," where "0" represents no brightness, "1" represents the lowest brightness, and "F" represents the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" includes modes of operation other than the "off" and "on" states described above, where the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly switching between on and off or partially off. Specifically, "flashing" includes switching between a brightness data value of "2" to "F" and a brightness data value of "0" or "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, there is a "hazy illumination" mode for the lamps. However, hazy illumination is a state where the game effect lamps 9 are dimly lit while changing brightness, whereas flashing differs in that all the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 repeatedly switch between on and off or partially off.

[Explanation regarding the game effect indicator lights]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 127 to 133.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data tables]
The CPU 120 for performance control uses the lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by turning them on, blinking, or turning them off.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that decrements by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying each part, the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extended command (for example, extended command BXXX, where "X" is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5, according to the display control it is performing, and transmits this extended command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) controlled by the display control unit 123.

Figure 127 illustrates an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in Figure 127, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs a predetermined display control, it sends an extended command (BXXX) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the display control. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lit or unlit) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about the lamps subject to lamp control; information about lamps not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 129, side lamp 9b is specified as the target of lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and the maximum time for lamp control by this child table is specified as 600,000 ms (600,000/10). Note that for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which corresponding information is not stored in the parent table (in Figure 129, main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information in the parent table that was last set previously will continue.

As shown in Figure 127, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, if the maximum time is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it decrements a counter by 1 every 10 ms to measure this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 measures 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter decrementing process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until it has measured the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes). Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives another extended command after receiving an extended command but before it has measured the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it stops the currently running lamp control and controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extended command. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control via the child table is set to 600,000 ms, significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Therefore, even if the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive the next extended command for any reason, it can continue the lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores information specifying the sub-table referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for each lamp control, for each lamp (illuminated location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table only stores information about lamps that are subject to lamp control; information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 130, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the following are specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed: grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 with an execution time of 500 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 with an execution time of 500 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 with an execution time of 230 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, and grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 with an execution time of 600,000 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table. Furthermore, in the sub-table, for the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored (in Figure 130, the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control continues based on the information from the most recently set sub-table.

As shown in Figure 127, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it first controls the target lamp using the first specified grandchild table, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then controls the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table. This process is performed for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, with the child table shown in Figure 130, for the side lamp 9b, it first controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is measured, then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is measured, then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is measured. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, by setting the maximum time for lamp control via the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms—significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene)—the performance control CPU 120 can continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if it fails to receive the next extended command for any reason.

Furthermore, in the child table, when the side lamps 9b are to be controlled, there are cases where one grandchild table, XD___LWU_1_XXX_1, is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, as shown in Figure 131, or where two grandchild tables, XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1, are specified, although these are not shown. When one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the CPU 120 for performance control uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the CPU 120 for performance control uses one of the two grandchild tables to control the left side lamp 9b and the other grandchild table to control the right side lamp 9b. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, common lamp control is performed for both the left and right side lamps 9b. However, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left and right side lamps 9b.

The sub-table stores, for each lamp (the illuminated area) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that are subject to lamp control, the brightness data referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time of the lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the sub-table only stores information about lamps that are subject to lamp control; information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 131, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), the brightness data is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The following are specified as the order in which lamp control based on brightness data is executed: 0x000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms. Furthermore, in the sub-table, for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored (in Figure 131, the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information in the last previously set sub-table continues.

In the luminance data for the left and right side lamps 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the sub-table shown in Figures 129 to 131, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, and the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b. The values shown indicate the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, as shown by the last 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6; the values shown by the last 4 to 6 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, as shown by the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the values shown by the last 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, as shown by the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the values shown by the last 4 to 6 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, as shown by the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; and the values shown by the last 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11, as shown by the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, when separate sub-tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, in the luminance data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~), the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, and the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 are on the left side The RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top on side lamp 9b are shown, and the last three digits of the data corresponding to the 5th and 6th lamps indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th lamps indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th lamps indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 11th lamp indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the 11th lamp from the top of lamp b. In the luminance data for the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_2_~), the 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the 1st lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 1st to 3rd digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the 2nd lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the 3rd lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 1st to 3rd digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the 4th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, from the fourth to the sixth digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, from the fourth to the sixth digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to number 11, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values in the first to third digits from the bottom indicate the RGB value of the main lamp 9a. Also, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LLOGO_~) specifying the movable lamp 9d, the values in the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, the values in the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, the values in the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, and the values in the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, and the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicate the RGB value of the fifth lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LATAK_~) specifying attacker lamp 9c, the values from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, the values from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, the values from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, and the values from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c. Additionally, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LPUSH_~) specifying button lamp 9e, the values from the first to third digits of the data indicate the RGB value of button lamp 9e.

The luminance data values correspond to the current values output to the lamps being controlled. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (e.g., 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when luminance data "A" is output to the "R" element, the current corresponding to that "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element. When luminance data "1" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "1" luminance data flows to the "G" element. When luminance data "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "F" luminance data flows to the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by flowing a current corresponding to the luminance data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can light up in colors corresponding to various effects and characters based on the luminance data. For example, if the luminance data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up red. Similarly, if the luminance data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up reddish-purple. Also, if the luminance data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up yellow.

As shown in Figure 127, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the sub-table, for example, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver. This process is performed for all specified brightness data in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 130, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, until 100 ms is first measured, the brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x00000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The system outputs 0x000 to the LED driver, then outputs brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, until 120ms have elapsed. Then, it outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, until 40ms have elapsed. The LED driver then supplies the corresponding current to the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the CPU 120 for performance control has timers corresponding to the parent table, child table, and grandchild table. It controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while subtracting these timers at a fixed period (for example, a 10ms period).

Specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table. When it has finished outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still has a value remaining, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, while the CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0, it then sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This causes the grandchild table to switch, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in Figure 128, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time for the first lamp control to be performed on the side lamp 9b, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified. 500 ms is specified as the time for the second lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. 230 ms is specified as the time for the third lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified. 600000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, for side lamp 9b, the luminance data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, The process is specified to execute at 100ms intervals in the order of "0x499". For the sake of explanation, the luminance data from the first 100ms will be referred to as Data 1, the luminance data from the second 100ms as Data 2, the luminance data from the third 100ms as Data 3, and the luminance data from the fourth 100ms as Data 4.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when performing lamp control for the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 specified in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, counts the specified 500ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10ms. Until the count reaches 500ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 (data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4) to the LED driver at 100ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. If the count has not yet reached 500ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it restarts outputting the brightness data to the LED driver, starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 500ms, the CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 and starts outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 (specified by the child table).

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, which is the fourth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, it counts down to the specified 600,000 ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10 ms. Until the count reaches 600,000 ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. However, if the count has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it outputs the brightness data to the LED driver again, starting from the first data 1 in order. When the count reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. In this case, since no further grandchild tables are specified in the child table, the output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will begin. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the timer will not reach 600,000 ms. Before the timer reaches 600,000 ms, the display control unit 123 will receive the next extended command, and the output of luminance data based on the parent, child, and grandchild tables specified in the newly received extended command will begin.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the parent table serves as a troubleshooting mechanism. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on performance control commands from the main board 11 to perform lamp control. However, even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a particular parent table, and the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive performance control commands from the main board 11, lamp control will continue for 10 minutes based on the same parent table. This prevents a chain reaction of different lamp controls from occurring due to the malfunction.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 130, the execution time for lamp control by the last specified grandchild table is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the child table serves to prevent the lamp control from being performed again by the first specified grandchild table when the timer value corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still active.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, the execution time for lamp control referencing the last specified brightness data may be set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This configuration prevents the lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table, even when the timer value corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, because the timer in the child table is still active. By setting the last specified brightness data in the grandchild table to 10 minutes, the lamp is maintained at a predetermined level of illumination, thus preventing the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination. Moreover, specifying 600,000 ms (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, as specified at the end of the child table, can more effectively prevent the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination.

[Regarding the lamp data table used during non-gameplay, Part 1]
Figure 134 shows the lamp data table used when not playing (only the white flashing button and red flashing button are used during gameplay).

The background shown in Figure 134 is the lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B10E transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the normal background image after a power outage (when controlled to the normal state), after the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state, after the end of the variation in the normal state, after the end of the variation of the last game in the time-saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the normal state), after the demo movie ends in the normal state, and after the menu display ends in the normal state, uses the normal background to control the game effect lamp 9.

The background time reduction shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time reduction background image. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B11D transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the time reduction background image after a power outage (when controlled to the time reduction state), after the end of the variation in the time reduction state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the time reduction state), after the end of the demo movie in the time reduction state, and after the end of the menu display in the time reduction state, uses the normal background to control the game effect lamp 9.

The background probability change shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the probability change background image. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B121 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the probability change background image after a power outage (when controlled to the probability change state), after the end of the variation in the probability change state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the probability change state), after the end of the demo movie in the probability change state, and after the end of the menu display in the probability change state, controls the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background.

The customer-waiting demo shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command BF01 transmitted when the conditions for starting the customer-waiting demo performance are met and the display control unit 123 performs control to display the image corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance, uses the customer-waiting demo to control the game effect lamp 9.

The white button illumination shown in Figure 134 represents the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e, corresponding to non-game states except during initialization notification. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after power loss and recovery, after the completion of the initialization notification associated with the game state initialization, and after the completion of the operation-prompting performance, uses the white button illumination to control the game effect lamp 9.

The white flashing of the button shown in Figure 134 represents the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect. When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the extended command B002, which is transmitted in conjunction with the control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, it uses the white flashing of the button to control the game effect lamp 9.

The red flashing of the button shown in Figure 134 represents the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect. When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B003 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, it uses the white flashing of the button to control the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompting effects. Except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompting effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the button's white illumination. Also, since the white illumination, white blinking, and red blinking button illumination do not specify any game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying the white illumination, white blinking, or red blinking button illumination, it continues to control the game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification. When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image corresponding to the initialization notification, it uses the initialization to control the game effect lamp 9.

The error shown in Figure 134 is the lamp data table for the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the error, it uses the error to control the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, since no game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a are specified in the error, the CPU 120 for performance control will continue to perform lamp control for game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a based on the previous lamp data table, even when it receives an extended command specifying an error.

[Lamp Data Table: Normal Background]
Figure 135 shows the settings of the normal parent table used when the extended command B10E is received, Figure 136 shows the settings of the normal child table used in the lamp data table, and Figures 137 to 138 show the settings of the normal grandchild table used in the lamp data table.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of the normal background image, it specifies the normal background parent table based on the extended command B10E. As shown in Figure 135, the normal background parent table is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the normal background parent table.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 136.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (Figure 137), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 137, the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is based on a blue-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a operates in a lighting pattern where the brightness changes based on a blue color.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the newly received extended command and the lamp data table.

As shown in Figures 135 to 138, the background normal parent table has child tables set up that reference the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set up in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c in the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The background data, including the brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the normal child table for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, is also based on a blue-based brightness. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also exhibit a brightness change pattern based on a blue color scheme.

Furthermore, since the background parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Time Reduction]
Figure 139 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: background time reduction used when the extended command: B11D is received, Figure 140 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: background time reduction, and Figures 141 to 142 show the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background time reduction.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B11D transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of a time-saving background image, it specifies the parent table for background time-saving based on the extended command B11D. As shown in Figures 139 to 142, the parent table for background time-saving contains child tables referenced for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables also contain referenced grandchild tables, and these grandchild tables contain referenced brightness data in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control refers to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables, and controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c in the same procedure as for normal background control.

The luminance data set in the grandchild tables referenced by the background time-saving child table for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c is set to a luminance based on green. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also change in luminance based on green.

Furthermore, since the parent table for background time reduction does not contain child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Probability Change]
Figure 143 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: background probability variation used when the extended command: B121 is received, Figure 144 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: background probability variation, and Figures 145 to 146 show the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background probability variation.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B121 transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of the background image for the probability variation mode, it specifies the parent table for the background probability variation mode based on the extended command B121. As shown in Figures 143 to 146, the parent table for the background probability variation mode has child tables set up to reference the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up to reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set up in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control refers to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables, and controls the lamps of the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c in the same procedure as for normal background control.

The sub-table of the background probability variation refers to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. The brightness data set in these sub-tables is based on a purple color scheme. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also change brightness based on a purple color scheme.

Furthermore, since the parent table for background probability variation does not contain child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
Figure 147 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, which is used when the extended command: BF01 is received. Figure 148 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo. Figures 149 to 155 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command BF01 transmitted by the display control unit when performing display control for the customer-waiting demo, specifies the parent table of the customer-waiting demo based on the extended command BF01. As shown in Figure 147, the parent table of the customer-waiting demo is configured to control the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command BF01, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer-waiting demo.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 148.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is initially set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks white at the start of the company name section that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 150 and 151), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up white for the duration of the company name segment of the customer waiting demo performance, and its illumination pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the company name characters.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 9500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02), refers to the common table (grandchild table) XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the third item in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. The common table is a grandchild table that is referenced in common even if the parent tables are different. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for the duration of the parts of the customer waiting demo performance: machine introduction 1, machine introduction 2-1, machine introduction 3-1, machine introduction 2-2, machine introduction 3-1, and machine introduction 2-3.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the fourth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table shared with the one used when displaying the title for the jackpot state. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to rainbow colors throughout the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the fifth grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of the first subtitle part of the customer waiting demo performance, the main lamp 9a blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the sixth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set as the seventh entry in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks white at the start of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the eighth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamp. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the 9th entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, refers to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 155), which is set as the 10th entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up white during the duration of the warning 1 and warning 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06), refers to the common table (grandchild table) XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the 11th item in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent by the display control unit 123 when performing display control such as a normal background. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the lamp data table. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the illumination mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 147, the parent table of the customer-waiting demo is configured to control the side lamp 9b by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BF01, it refers to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the customer-waiting demo's parent table to control the side lamp 9b.

The child table, XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, contains the grandchild table of side ramp 9b and the execution time, in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 148.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is initially set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks white at the start of the company name section that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 150 and 151), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamps 9b illuminate in white for the duration of the company name segment of the customer waiting demo performance, and their illumination pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the company name characters.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 9500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the third item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the fourth grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Figure 152), which is set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, during the duration of the machine introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color in the following order: green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white, according to the type of character appearing.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 12,500 ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03), refers to the fifth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 153), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up white and changes its illumination pattern in a predetermined sequence throughout the duration of the machine introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the sixth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 154), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks green throughout the period of the machine introduction 3-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 1000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05), refers to the seventh grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 153), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, during the period of the machine introduction 2-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and its illumination pattern changes according to a predetermined pattern.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 154), which is set as the eighth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks green throughout the period of the machine introduction 3-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 1000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 153), which is set as the ninth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, during the period of the machine introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and its illumination pattern changes according to a predetermined pattern.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the 10th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the 11th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table shared with the one used when displaying the title for the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors throughout the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set as the 12th entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of subtitle part 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the 13th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes its illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set as the 14th entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks white at the start of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the 15th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the 16th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 155), which is set as the 17th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamps 9b light up white during the duration of the warning 1 and warning 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the 18th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent by the display control unit 123 when performing display control such as a normal background. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the lamp data table. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the illumination mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figures 147 to 155, the parent table for the customer waiting demo has child tables that reference the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables have their referenced grandchild tables set in execution order, and these grandchild tables have their referenced brightness data set in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c using the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

As a result, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c flash white for 500ms at the start of the company name part of the customer waiting demo performance after the start of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of the company name part of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in accordance with the movement of the company name letters, then turn off for 500ms, change their illumination color in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character that appears during the duration of machine introduction 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of machine introduction 2-1 of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the duration of machine introduction 3-1 of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of machine introduction 2-2 of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the duration of machine introduction 3-2 of the customer waiting demo performance, and the customer waiting demo During the period of the machine introduction 2-3 that constitute the performance, the light illuminates in white, and the illumination pattern changes in a predetermined sequence. Afterward, it remains off for 500ms. During the main title part of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. At the start of subtitle 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, it blinks in white. During subtitle 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. At the start of subtitle 2 of the customer waiting demo performance, it blinks in white. During subtitle 2 of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. Afterward, it remains off for 500ms. During the warning 1 and warning 2 parts of the customer waiting demo performance, it illuminates in white, then remains off for 500ms. It remains off until a new extended command is received, and upon receiving a new extended command, it switches to the illumination pattern based on the received extended command.

In this manner, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BF01, it performs lamp control based on the extended command BF01 and the lamp data table: customer waiting demo. As a result, the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c change their emission color and emission pattern according to each part of the customer waiting demo performance.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the customer waiting demo does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

Furthermore, in the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo, sub-tables are specified for each of the following parts: company name part, model introduction part 1, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, model introduction 2-3, main title part, subtitle part 1, subtitle part 2, and warning part. Therefore, lamp control can be performed so that the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c emit light in a manner appropriate to each part.

Furthermore, in the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo, for the main lamp 9a, a sub-table is specified for each of the following parts: company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part. However, for the parts that make up the model introduction part—model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3—only one sub-table is specified, thus reducing the overall data volume.

Furthermore, the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo does not include a sub-table for button lamp 9e. Since lamp control for button lamp 9e is based on the first sub-table from before the customer waiting demo, the overall amount of data can be reduced.

Furthermore, for sub-tables that control the lights to be off or those that emit rainbow colors, a common table used in common with other parent tables is used for lamp control, thus reducing the overall data size. Sub-tables that temporarily emit white light can also be controlled using the common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lights up white]
Figure 156 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white light used when the extended command: B001 is received, Figure 157 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: button white light, and Figure 158 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button white light.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after power loss and recovery, the completion of the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state, and the completion of the operation promotion performance, specifies the parent table for the white button illumination based on the extended command B001. As shown in Figure 156, the parent table for the white button illumination is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Upon receiving the extended command B001, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referring to the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the white button illumination.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 157.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (Figure 158), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 158. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, is set to a brightness that emits white light, causing the button lamp 9e to light up white.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the button that lights up white does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashes white]
Figure 159 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, which is used when the extended command: B002 is received. Figure 160 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, and Figure 161 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button blinking white.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B002 transmitted in conjunction with the control of displaying an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, specifies the parent table for button white flashing based on the extended command B002. As shown in Figure 159, the parent table for button white flashing is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command B002, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for button white flashing.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 160.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (Figure 161), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 161. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, includes settings for brightness levels that emit white light and an off state, causing the button lamp 9e to blink white.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the white blinking button does not contain child or grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashes red]
Figure 162 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: red blinking button, which is used when the extended command: B003 is received. Figure 163 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: red blinking button, and Figure 164 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: red blinking button.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives an extended command B003 transmitted in conjunction with the control of displaying an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, it specifies the parent table for the red button flashing based on the extended command B003. As shown in Figure 162, the parent table for the red button flashing is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B003, it performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referring to the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the red button flashing.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 163.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (Figure 164), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 164, the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU includes settings for brightness levels that emit red light and an off state, causing the button lamp 9e to blink red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the red flashing button does not contain child or grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp Data Table: Initialization Notification]
Figure 165 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: initialization notification used when the extended command: BFF is received, Figure 166 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: initialization notification, and Figure 167 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: initialization notification.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, it specifies the parent table for the initialization notification based on the extended command BFF. As shown in Figure 165, the parent table for the initialization notification is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table for the initialization notification.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 166.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (Figure 167), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in Figure 167. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, is set to a brightness that causes red light to be emitted, and the main lamp 9a lights up red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again and repeats the same control process. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the newly received extended command and the lamp data table.

As shown in Figures 165 to 167, the parent table for initialization notification has child tables that reference the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. These child tables also have grandchild tables that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data and other information set in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control controls the lamps of the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e using the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The child table of the initialization notification also references a grandchild table for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. The brightness data set in this grandchild table also includes a brightness setting that causes the lamps to emit red light. Therefore, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e will also light up in red.

[Lamp data table: Error]
Figure 168 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: error used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, Figure 169 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: error, and Figure 170 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: error.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to an error, it specifies the error's parent table based on the extended command BFF1. As shown in Figure 168, the error's parent table is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF1, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the error's parent table.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 169.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_ERROR (Figure 170), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in Figure 170. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains settings for brightness levels that emit red light and an off state, causing the main lamp 9a to blink red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP again and repeats the same control process. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the error does not contain child or grandchild tables for side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, or button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Common Table]
Common tables are grandchild tables that are referenced by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in Figures 171 to 175, they include common tables that turn off the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e (XD___L~_OFF), common tables that slowly change the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01), and common tables that rapidly change the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors (XD___L~_RAINBOW_02).

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. It is possible to control some of the game effect lamps 9 using these common tables.

By providing a common table that can be referenced and used for lamp control from child tables set in different parent tables, data capacity can be reduced.

As described above, the present invention is
A gaming machine that, upon fulfilling the activation conditions, performs a variable display of specific identification information, and when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
Game control means,
A means of controlling the performance,
A means of display, and comprising,
The aforementioned game control means is
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information is performed,
It can be controlled to a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more easily performed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of performing variable displays of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The aforementioned decorative identification information includes a numerical image,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform a notification effect that indicates whether or not the system is controlled to the aforementioned advantageous state.
From the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the execution of the notification effect, the background image can normally be displayed.
In the aforementioned notification presentation, a specific background image different from the normal background image is displayed.
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect.
Upon the termination of the notification effect, the specific background image is removed and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed.
The specified image is displayed in a manner in which it operates in close proximity to the numerical image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specified display result that is displayed when the normal background image is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, the specific image is not displayed.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display ends, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the decorative identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the decorative identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the startup condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the decorative identification information before the transparency of the decorative identification information reaches the second value.
According to the present invention, in the normal state, the effect of the performance is enhanced and exciting by displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance. However, in the special state where the average variable display period is short, the variable display can be made to feel faster by not displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance. Furthermore, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the decorative identification information becomes high, it is possible to signal that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. Thus, the present invention can suitably enhance the effect of the performance when the decorative identification information indicating that the variable display is controlled to a favorable state has stopped, and can also perform suitable customer waiting control. Therefore, the present invention has high marketability.

While embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

For example, in the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the first performance mode can be executed in a low-base state, the second performance mode in a low-probability, high-base state, and the third performance mode in a high-probability, high-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute two or more performance modes in a low-base state, three or more performance modes in a high-base state, or only one performance mode.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which vertical scrolling is performed in the first display mode, rotational display in the second display mode, and vertical scrolling display in the third display mode, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the manner of variable display of decorative patterns in each display mode can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a scenario where a jackpot state is applied as an example of a favorable state for the player, the present invention is not limited to this. Other favorable states such as a time-saving state, a probability variation state, or a minor win state may also be applied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal state is set to a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to perform variable displays and have a shorter average variable display period than the normal state, are set to a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be set to a low-probability state and the special states to a high-probability state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the present invention was illustrated as being applied to a pachinko game machine 1 that has a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variation state (high probability high base state) as game states, and can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variation state at the end of a big win game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display result was displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low probability state, or a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display was executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state in the low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after a RAM clear (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a big win can be designated as Time-Saving State A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state during a low-probability state after the end of an advantageous state or a RAM clear (cold start of pachinko machine 1) can be designated as Time-Saving State B, and the time-saving state controlled based on a specific result being displayed during a portion of the cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low-probability state can be designated as Time-Saving State C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine capable of controlling the aforementioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results that result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may differ depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of this invention can be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay; it is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, but may also be a general-purpose game machine.

1. Pachinko game machine 4A, 1st special symbol display device 4B, 2nd special symbol display device 5, image display device 100, microcomputer for game control 120, CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that, upon fulfillment of the activation conditions, performs variable display of identification information including first identification information and second identification information, and can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
In one performance mode, it is possible to switch between and display multiple types of background displays, including the first background display and the second background display.
When switching the background display from the first background display to the second background display, it is possible to perform a background fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the first background display, and a background fade-in display that gradually decreases the transparency of the second background display.
The region in which the variable display of the identification information is performed includes at least a first region and a second region,
When the variable display of the identification information is started, the variable display of the first identification information is started in the first region and the variable display of the second identification information is started in the second region.
When the variable display of the first identification information is started, a first identification information fade-out display is possible in the first area, which gradually increases the transparency of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is started, a second identification information fade-out display is possible in the second area, which gradually increases the transparency of the second identification information.
When the variable display of the identification information is terminated, the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down in the first region, and the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down in the second region.
When the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down, a first identification information fade-in display is possible in which the transparency of the first identification information is gradually reduced in the first region, and when the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down, a second identification information fade-in display is possible in which the transparency of the second identification information is gradually reduced in the second region.
At least the first identification information fade-out display or the second identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display can be executed at the same time.
The execution period for the first identification information fade-out display and the execution period for the second identification information fade-out display are the same.
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the first identification information fade-out display and the second identification information fade-out display.
During the first period after the game has ended, the background display can be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display can be shown.
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display switches from the background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the start condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the display will switch from the demonstration display to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information before the fade-out display of the first identification information and the fade-out display of the second identification information are started.
Information regarding the variable display of the aforementioned identification information can be displayed as a specific display.
When the background display is displayed, the specific display can be displayed.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed, the aforementioned specific display can be displayed,
The total number of luminance data in the aforementioned demonstration display luminance data table is greater than the total number of luminance data in the aforementioned background display luminance data table.
It is possible to display a volume control guide to help with volume adjustment.
If the game is played while the volume adjustment guidance display is not displayed, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the game, the volume adjustment guidance display can be displayed. Subsequently, if the conditions for starting the demonstration display are met, the demonstration display can be displayed without displaying the volume adjustment guidance display.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.